Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................................2
Program Support / User Assistance ..............................................................................................................3
COADE Technical Support ..........................................................................................................................4
Database Definitions...................................................................................................................................23
Structural Database..........................................................................................................................23
Piping Size Specification (ANSI/JIS/DIN/BS)................................................................................23
Valves and Flanges..........................................................................................................................23
Expansion Joints ..............................................................................................................................24
Units File Name...............................................................................................................................24
System Directory Name...................................................................................................................24
Load Case Template ........................................................................................................................24
Default Spring Hanger Table...........................................................................................................24
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases ......................................................................24
Append Reruns to Existing Data .....................................................................................................24
ODBC Compliant Database Name ..................................................................................................25
Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................................26
Output Table of Contents ................................................................................................................26
Output Reports by Load Case..........................................................................................................26
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ..........................................................................................26
Time History Animation..................................................................................................................27
Dynamic Example Input Text..........................................................................................................27
Memory Allocated...........................................................................................................................27
User ID ............................................................................................................................................27
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail.........................................................................................27
Disable Undo/Redo Ability .............................................................................................................27
Enable Autosave ..............................................................................................................................28
Autosave Time Interval ...................................................................................................................28
Prompted Autosave .........................................................................................................................28
Set/Change Password..................................................................................................................................29
Access Protected Data .....................................................................................................................29
Change Password.............................................................................................................................29
Remove Password ...........................................................................................................................29
Units File Operations ..................................................................................................................................30
Make Units File ...............................................................................................................................30
Review Existing Units File..............................................................................................................30
Create a New Units File...................................................................................................................31
Existing File to Start From ..............................................................................................................32
New Units File Name ......................................................................................................................32
View/Edit File .................................................................................................................................32
Convert Input to New Units........................................................................................................................33
Name of the Input File to Convert...................................................................................................33
Name of the Units File to Use .........................................................................................................33
Name of the Converted File.............................................................................................................33
Material Database .......................................................................................................................................34
Material - Add .................................................................................................................................34
Material - Delete..............................................................................................................................34
Material - Edit..................................................................................................................................35
Reducers ..........................................................................................................................................25
Auxiliary Fields - Boundary Conditions.....................................................................................................28
Restraints .........................................................................................................................................28
Hangers............................................................................................................................................31
Nozzles .......................................................................................................................................................41
Nozzle Flexibility - WRC 297.........................................................................................................41
API 650 NOZZLES .........................................................................................................................44
PD 5500 Nozzles .............................................................................................................................46
Displacements.............................................................................................................................................49
Auxiliary Fields - Imposed Loads...............................................................................................................50
Forces and Moments........................................................................................................................50
Uniform Loads.................................................................................................................................50
Wind Loads .....................................................................................................................................51
Wave Loads .....................................................................................................................................51
Auxiliary Fields - Piping Code Data...........................................................................................................53
Allowable Stresses...........................................................................................................................53
Material Fatigue Curves ..................................................................................................................63
Archive Password ............................................................................................................................64
Available Commands..................................................................................................................................65
Break Command ..............................................................................................................................65
Valve/Flange Database ....................................................................................................................67
Find Distance...................................................................................................................................70
Find Element ...................................................................................................................................70
Global Coordinates ..........................................................................................................................70
Insert Element..................................................................................................................................71
Node Increment ...............................................................................................................................71
Show Informational Messages.........................................................................................................71
Tee SIF Scratchpad..........................................................................................................................71
Bend SIF Scratchpad .......................................................................................................................76
Expansion Joint Modeler .................................................................................................................80
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes.......................................................................................................83
Expansion Joint Design Notes .........................................................................................................84
Torsional Spring Rates ....................................................................................................................84
Bellows Application Notes ..............................................................................................................84
Available Expansion Joint End-Types.............................................................................................84
Pressure Rating ................................................................................................................................85
Expansion Joint Styles.....................................................................................................................85
Materials ..........................................................................................................................................86
Title Page.........................................................................................................................................87
Hanger Data.....................................................................................................................................88
Special Execution Parameters..........................................................................................................94
Combining Independent Piping Systems.......................................................................................103
Including Structural Models ..........................................................................................................104
List/Edit Facility ............................................................................................................................105
Block Operations ...........................................................................................................................106
Printing an Input Listing................................................................................................................110
Input Plotting .................................................................................................................................111
Model Rotation, Panning, and Zooming........................................................................................111
Views.............................................................................................................................................112
Volume Plotting.............................................................................................................................113
Displaying Element Information ...................................................................................................113
Contents 5
YM...................................................................................................................................................54
POIS ................................................................................................................................................54
G ......................................................................................................................................................54
YS....................................................................................................................................................54
DENS...............................................................................................................................................54
ALPHA............................................................................................................................................54
Data Processing - STAT .............................................................................................................................55
Structural Databases ...................................................................................................................................56
AISC 1977 Database .......................................................................................................................56
AISC 1989 Database .......................................................................................................................60
German 1991 Database....................................................................................................................66
Australian 1990 Database................................................................................................................67
South African 1992 Database ..........................................................................................................70
UK 1993 Database...........................................................................................................................72
Korean 1990 Database.....................................................................................................................72
Chapter 8: Interfaces 1
Overview of CAESAR II Interfaces .............................................................................................................2
CAD Interfaces .............................................................................................................................................4
CADWorx/PIPE Link........................................................................................................................4
DXF AutoCAD Interface...................................................................................................................4
CADPIPE Interface ...........................................................................................................................5
Contents 9
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
In This Chapter
Overview .....................................................................................2
Program Support / User Assistance .............................................3
COADE Technical Support.........................................................4
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Overview
This CAESAR II Technical Reference Guide is the reference manual for CAESAR II. It presents the theory
behind CAESAR II operations, and explains why certain tasks are performed. Users are urged to review the
background material contained in this manual, especially when applying CAESAR II to unfamiliar types of
analysis.
Chapter 2 (see "Configuration and Environment" on page 1) discusses the configuration of CAESAR II and
the resulting environment. This includes language support and program customization. In addition to the
COADE supplied routines, several third-party diagnostic packages are also mentioned.
Chapter 3 (see "Piping Screen Reference" on page 1), Piping Input Reference, contains images of program
generated screens, and explains each input cell, menu option, and toolbar button. Also discussed in detail
is the Plot Screen, which displays the input model graphically.
Chapter 4 (see "Structural Steel Modeler" on page 1) examines the Structural Steel Modeler and describes
all commands, toolbar buttons, menu items, and input fields.
Chapter 5 (see "Controlling the Dynamic Solution" on page 1) discusses the Dynamic Input and Control
Parameters: each input cell, toolbar button, and menu item is examined. The purpose and effects of the
various Dynamic Control Parameters are detailed.
Chapter 6 (see "Technical Discussions" on page 1) contains theoretical overviews of various technical
methods used in CAESAR II. Both common and advanced modeling techniques are covered.
Chapter 7 (see "Miscellaneous Processors" on page 1) provides information regarding a few
miscellaneous auxiliary processors.
Chapter 8 (see "Interfaces" on page 1) details interfaces between CAESAR II and other programs.
Chapter 9 (see "File Sets" on page 1) presents a list of files associated with CAESAR II.
Chapter 10 (see "Update History" on page 1) lists the CAESAR II update history.
Chapter 1 Introduction 3
CHAPTER 2
In This Chapter
Generation of the CAESAR II Configuration File ......................2
Computation Control...................................................................3
SIFs and Stresses.........................................................................8
Geometry Directives....................................................................15
Plot Colors...................................................................................17
FRP Pipe Properties ....................................................................20
Database Definitions ...................................................................23
Miscellaneous..............................................................................26
Set/Change Password ..................................................................29
Units File Operations ..................................................................30
Convert Input to New Units ........................................................33
Material Database........................................................................34
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Important: The caesar.cfg file may vary from machine to machine and many of the setup directives
modify the analysis. Do not expect the same input file to produce identical results between machines
unless the setup files are identical. It is advised that a copy of the setup file be archived with input and
output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if modified by the user, would also need to
be identical if the same results are to be produced.
The following section explains the CAESAR II setup file options. They are grouped as they appear when
chosen from the tabs on the Configure window.
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 3
Computation Control
Alpha Tolerance
The breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the input spreadsheet is a
thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default is 0.05. This means that any entry in the Temp
fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a thermal expansion coefficient in terms of
inches per inch (dimensionless). Use of this field provides some interesting modeling tools. If an Alpha
Tolerance of 1.1 is set, then an entry in the Temp 2 field of -1 causes the element defined by this
expansion coefficient to shrink to zero length. This alternate method of specifying cold spring is quite
useful in jobs having hanger design with cold spring (see chapter 6 (see "Technical Discussions" on page
1) for more details regarding Cold Spring).
Ambient Temperature
If 0.0 is entered here, the default ambient temperature for all elements in the system is (degrees ^07) ^^07
1H ,F8.2^70.000E0.
If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion strain state, then enter a different
value in this field.
Friction Stiffness
Friction restraint stiffness. The default is 1E6 lb/in. This value is used when a friction restraint is "non-
sliding." In the "non-sliding" state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint’s line of action and opposing any sliding motion. This is the first parameter that should be
adjusted to help a slowly converging problem where friction is suspected. Lower stiffness values permit
more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the friction problem in general, this
error is not considered crucial.
WRC-107 Version
This directive sets the Version of the WRC-107 bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
August 1965
March 1979
March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves (default)
Bourdon Pressure
Select the BOURDON PRESSURE EFFECT from the drop list. The BOURDON EFFECT causes straight
pipe to elongate, and bends to "OPEN UP" translationally along a line connecting the curvature end
points. If the BOURDON EFFECT is not activated there will be no global displacements due to pressure.
Note: OPTION #1 is the same as OPTION #2 for straight pipe. For elbows, OPTION #1 should apply for
forged and welded fittings where the bend cross section can be considered essentially circular.
Note: The BOURDON EFFECT (translation only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used,
regardless of the actual setting of the BOURDON FLAG.
Where hangers are adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close (for example where there are
two hangers on either side of a trunnion support), the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate
poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible support for
computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to more effectively
distribute the system’s weight. A typical entry is 50,000; the default value is (1.0E12 lb/in).
This directive defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default this
value is assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).
This directive defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value
is assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).
8 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Default Code
The piping code the user designs to most often should go here. This code will be used as the default if no
code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical plant and petroleum
refinery code. Valid entries are B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.5, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter
VIII, B31.11, ASME-NC(Class 2), ASME-ND(Class 3), NAVY505, Z662, BS806, SWEDISH1,
SWEDISH2, B31.1-1967, STOOMWEZEN, RCCM-C, RCCM-D, CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS-
7159, UKOOA, IGE/TD/12, and DNV.
Use WRC329
This directive activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, (not just for reduced intersections).
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly in making
the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve the stress calculations for
all codes, not just the four discussed in Rodabaugh’s paper. Users not employing either B31.1, B31.3 or
the ASME NC or ND codes, and who wish to use WRC329 are encouraged to contact COADE for
additional information. Throughout this document WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330
was the draft version of 329). When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.
Use Schneider
This directive activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. It was because of observations by
Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started. Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could
be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range
the SIFs could be in error by a factor as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a
multiplication of the out of plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D
ratio for the intersection is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs the multiplication will be used for the single stress intensification given.
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 11
WRC329
Base Hoop Stress On ( ID/OD/Mean/Lamés )
This directive is used to indicate how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use
the ID of the pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of the
CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so changing this
directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If desired, the user may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. This directive has the
following options:
ID—Hoop stress is computed according to Pd/2t where “d” is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD—Hoop stress is computed according to Pd/2t where “d” is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean—Hoop stress is computed according to Pd/2t where “d” is the average or mean diameter of the pipe.
Lamés—Hoop stress is computed according to Lamés equation, = P ( Ri2 + Ri2 * Ro2 / R2 ) / ( Ro2 - Ri2 )
and varies through the wall as a function of R.
Use PD/4t
Enabling this directive causes CAESAR II to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when
computing sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when users are comparing CAESAR II results to those from an older pipe
stress program. The more comprehensive calculation, i.e. the Default, is recommended.
Reduced Intersection
Available options are B31.1(Pre 1980), B31.1(Post 1980), WRC329, ASME SEC III, and Schneider:
WRC 329
Allows the user to use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection
is any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations result in more
conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative stress calculations in others. In all
cases the WRC329 values should be more accurate, and more truly in-line with the respective codes intent.
Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has the same
effect as the Use Schneider option.
Schneider
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs
There has been considerable concern involving the SIFs for reduced fittings. Part of the discussion centers
around just what should be considered a reduced fitting. The CAESAR II default is to assume that welding
tees and reinforced fabricated tees are covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced
fitting expressions do not explicitly cover these intersection types. Users wishing to leave welding tees and
reinforced tees out of this definition should enable this directive.
Geometry Directives
Z-Axis Vertical
By default CAESAR II assumes the Y axis is vertical with the X and Z axes in the horizontal plane. If
desired, the Z axis can be made vertical by checking this box. In this case, the X and Y axes will be in the
horizontal plane.
16 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Plot Colors
Pipes
Enter the color for the center-line and volume plots of pipe elements. Excludes valves, other rigids and
expansion joints.
Nodes
Enter the color for the node numbers.
Rigids/Bends
Enter the color for the rigid elements and for bend highlighting in the input plot.
Hangers/Nozzles
Enter the color for the hanger and nozzle symbols that are displayed on the input plot.
Structure
Enter the color that the structural elements should be plotted in. The color selected should contrast with
the color entered for the Pipes.
Background
Enter the color for the plot background. The user should be careful setting this parameter because all other
colors need to coordinate with the background color selected.
18 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Axes
Enter the color of the plot axes that appear in the bottom left corner of the screen.
Labels
Enter the color for the geometry labels exclusive of the node numbers. Examples are, Diameter,
Thickness, Length, Plot Labeling.
Highlights
Enter the color for the input level plot highlight. The color selected should contrast with the color entered
for the Pipes.
Displaced Shape
Enter the color for the displaced shape overlay. The color selected should contrast with the color entered
for the Pipes.
Stress Level 1
Enter the stress value that defines the lower limit cutoff.
Stress Level 2
Enter the stress value that defines the second lowest stress color-plot limit.
Stress Level 3
Enter the stress value that defines the third lowest stress color-plot limit.
Stress Level 4
Enter the stress value that defines the fourth lowest stress color-plot limit.
Stress Level 5
Enter the stress value that defines the upper limit cutoff.
Note: The data lines must follow exactly the order shown above. The four data lines defining the
UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be omitted.
Weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the default weight density
of FRP materials in the piping input module.
Database Definitions
Structural Database
This directive specifies which database file is to be used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and
cross section properties from. The structural databases provided include AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German
1991, South African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, and United Kingdom.
Expansion Joints
This directive enables the user to specify which Expansion Joint database should be referenced by
CAESAR II during subsequent input sessions. The databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics,
IWK, and Piping Technology.
Miscellaneous
Memory Allocated
This setting modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to the CAESAR II
application. Setting this directive to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use
Virtual Memory (Hard Disk Space to be used as RAM) to be used. This may slow the program, however,
and is normally recommended only for very large piping models.
User ID
When more than one workstation attempts to the CAESAR II data in the same directory at the same time it
causes a corruption of the control file in the data directory, which may cause abnormal program execution.
Therefore, in situations where there may be more than one concurrent user running CAESAR II in a given
data directory each user (or more exactly, each workstation) should enter a three-character User ID in this
field. This creates a separate control file for each User ID to allow simultaneous access of the CAESAR II
data within the same directory.
Note: This User ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and not to the
user.
Enable Autosave
When this option is checked, CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
Prompted Autosave
When this option is checked, CAESAR II will prompt the user, at the specified time interval, to save the
input. If this option is not checked, the input will be saved automatically at the specified time intervals
(assuming autosave is enabled).
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 29
Set/Change Password
The Password button provides the user with the option of providing a password protection scheme for the
configuration file. By setting a password on the primary configuration file (done by setting the default data
directory to the CAESAR II program directory), a corporate standard can be enforced throughout the
network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data directories will allow modification
only of display or other environment directives (i.e., those that do not affect calculated results).
When this button is clicked, a secondary window is displayed with four possible selections:
New Password
Access Protected Data
Change Password
Remove Password
Once a password has been entered, the user has the ability to change configuration settings from the
program directory, or alter or remove the password. When entering a new password the user is prompted
for the new password a second time to ensure the password was typed as expected by the user the first
time.
Change Password
The current password may be changed at any time by a user who has authorization (he/she must enter the
correct existing password for access to this directive).
Once a password has been set, all computation controls, stress directives, and any other directives which
could affect the CAESAR II computations are disabled and cannot be changed by the user. All protected
directive labels, edit boxes, and default buttons are grayed out when disabled.
Remove Password
The current password may be removed at any time by a user with authorization to do so (he/she must enter
the correct existing password for access to this directive). Once a password has been removed, all
directives in Configure/Setup are modifiable by the user from any directory where he/she has read/write
access rights.
30 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The user may create a custom units file or review an existing units file by choosing TOOLS /MAKE UNITS FILE
from the CAESAR II Main Menu. An explanation of each input field and button under this option follows.
Units Maintenance
Choose this option to create a new units file. Clicking this button activates the next two items described
below. When all items are completed choose the View/Edit File button to proceed. A window will appear
in which the entries for the user's units and the conversion factor can be edited. If the user-defined units
for a given item exist in the list then there is no need to choose a conversion factor as it will be updated
automatically. If a new set of units is desired (miles in the length category for instance) then the user may
type in (or select from the drop down list) the new unit name (mi.) and the new conversion factor
(.00001578 in this example).
View/Edit File
Click this button to proceed once all activated lists on the Create New Units dialog have been completed.
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 33
The user may convert an existing input file to a new set of units by choosing TOOLS / CONVERT INPUT TO NEW
UNITS from the CAESAR II Main Menu. A window will be created that contains the following three input
fields:
Material Database
CAESAR II provides a material database (accessed with TOOL/MATERIAL DATABASE from the MAIN MENU listing
physical properties and code-dependent allowable stresses of more than 300 materials. These materials can
be edited and additional materials can be added to the database by the user.
Note: It is incumbent upon the user to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While COADE attempts to keep the material database up-to-date the codes are
subject to change frequently and the accuracy of the database is not guaranteed. Below is an explanation
of the input fields for the Material Database.
Material - Add
To add a new material spreadsheet to the database. This command saves any data currently shown on the
spreadsheet and clears the spreadsheet for a new entry. At least a material number and code must be given
for the data to be saved.
Material - Delete
This operation deletes the entire material spreadsheet from the database. The user may choose the
spreadsheet to delete from the list which contains only user-defined database spreadsheets. The user
cannot delete the material database spreadsheets supplied with the CAESAR II program.
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 35
Material - Edit
To edit an existing material spreadsheet in the database. A window will appear from which the user must
either type the name of the material or pick the material from the list. The piping code ID on the right side
corresponds to the piping code ID on the piping input spreadsheet when allowables are chosen.
Number
Enter a number by which the material is to be referenced. The number must be between 101 and 699
inclusive and should not already be a reference for another material.
Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.
Applicable Piping Code
Enter the CAESAR II piping code number for the material. A list of the piping code numbers for the various
codes are listed below.
ALL B31.5 NAVY 505 Stoomwezen FDBR
Eff, Cf, z
This factor is necessary for various piping codes as defined below:
STOOMWEZEN - The cyclic reduction factor, referred to in the code as Cf.
NORWEGIAN - This is the circumferential weld strength factor, “z”. If not entered, it defaults to 1.0.
BS 7159 - This field is the ratio of the design stress sd, in the circumferential (hoop) direction to the
design stress in the longitudinal direction. Since design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of the code as:
dÆ = d * ElamÆ, sd x = d * Elamx
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry will also be the ratio of the moduli of
elasticity
ElamÆ (hoop) to Elamx (longitudinal).
If left blank, a value of 1.0 will be used.
Density
Enter the density of the material.
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D)
As defined by B31.3 (Section 323.2.2), some carbon steels are limited to a “minimum metal” temperature
as shown in Figure 323.2.2. This cell is used to specify which curve should be used to check this material.
If this code section is applicable, specify either A, B, C, or D. If this code section is not applicable, leave
this cell blank. Note that this information is not currently used by CAESAR II.
FAC
A factor necessary for various piping codes as defined below:
Stoomwezen—This value should be either 0.44 or 0.5 and is used in computing the equilibrium stresses as
discussed in Section 5.2 of the code. The value of 0.5 can be used for steel if the design and fabrication are
such that stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian (units: 106) Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature “Rm”. If not entered, this
factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Poisson's Ratio
For Metals only.
Enter the value to be used for Poisson’s Ratio for this material.
Temperature
In this field enter the temperatures corresponding to the database values you will add to the right. In the
database supplied with CAESAR II all temperatures are in 100°F increments. Note that some of the codes
list physical property values in 50°F increments, therefore small discrepancies may occur between
CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of data.
Exp. Coeff.
Enter the expansion coefficient at the corresponding temperature. This coefficient must be multiplied by
106 F prior to being input here.
(ex. An expansion coefficient of 1.2 x 10-5 in/in/F would be input as 12).
Allowable Stress
Input the code allowable stress corresponding to the temperature to the left.
Chapter 2 Configuration and Environment 37
Elastic Modulus
This is the Modulus of Elasticity corresponding to the temperature to the left.
Yield Stress
This is the Yield Stress corresponding to the temperature to the left.
Ult Tensile Stress
BS 806—Mean Stress to Failure for design life at temperature
Swedish Method 1—Creep Rupture Stress at temperature.
Stoomwezen—Rrg average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at temperature
(vm).
IGE/TD/12 - Ultimate Tensile Strength
Norwegian - (UNITS: lb./sq.in.) Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature "Rm". If not
entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
1
CHAPTER 3
This chapter illustrates how to enter job parameters through the program's menus, fields, and commands.
In This Chapter
Piping Spreadsheet Data..............................................................2
Auxiliary Fields - Component Information .................................13
Auxiliary Fields - Boundary Conditions......................................28
Nozzles........................................................................................41
Displacements .............................................................................49
Auxiliary Fields - Imposed Loads ...............................................50
Auxiliary Fields - Piping Code Data ...........................................53
Available Commands ..................................................................65
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Name
The Name check box is used to assign non-numeric names to node points. Double-clicking this check box
activates an auxiliary spreadsheet where names, of up to 10 characters, can be assigned to the From and/or
To nodes. These names will show up in place of the node numbers in graphic plots and reports (possibly
truncated in 80 column reports).
DX
Delta X (DX) defines the element’s projected length along the global X direction.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]—[length]—[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. Simple forms of addition, multiplication,
and division may be used as well as exponential format.
Enter the DISTANCE between the "TO" and the "FROM" node along the direction specified.
DY
Delta Y (DY) defines the element’s projected length along the global Y direction.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]—[length]—[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. Simple forms of addition, multiplication,
and division may be used as well as exponential format.
Enter the DISTANCE between the "TO" and the "FROM" node along the direction specified.
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
DZ
Delta Z (DZ) defines the element’s projected length along the global Z direction.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]—[length]—[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. Simple forms of addition, multiplication,
and division may be used as well as exponential format.
Enter the DISTANCE between the "TO" and the "FROM" node along the direction specified.
Element Cosines
Element Length
Enter the DISTANCE between the "TO" and the "FROM" node.
Note that a "tic mark" ( ' ) can be used in place of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in the above examples.
Element Direction Cosines
Direction vector or direction cosines which define the center-line of the element.
For an element aligned with the "X" axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the "Y" axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 5
Element Offsets
Element Offsets are used to correct an element’s modeled dimensions back to its actual dimensions.
1 Activate by double-clicking the Offsets check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet. Deactivate by
double-clicking a second time.
2 Specify the distances from the TO node’s position in 3-D space to the actual TO end of the element.
3 Specify the distances from the FROM node’s position in 3-D space to the actual FROM end of the
element.
The Diameter field is used to specify the pipe diameter. Normally, the nominal diameter is entered, and
CAESAR II converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion: use a modified UNITS file with Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off, or enter
diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units the tolerance on diameter is
0.04 in.). Use <F1> to obtain additional information and the current units for this input field. Available
nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set via the configuration program.
The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
½ ¾ 1 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 42
Wt/Sch
The Wall Thickness/Schedule field is used to specify the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a
schedule indicator (such as S, XS, or 40), which will be converted to the proper wall thickness by
CAESAR II. If actual thickness is entered, CAESAR II will accept it as entered. Available schedule indicators
are determined by the active piping specification, set via the configuration program. The available
schedules are listed below.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
Corrosion
Enter the corrosion allowance to be used order to calculate a reduced section modulus. A “setup file”
directive is available to consider all stress cases as corroded.
Insul Thk
Enter the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the outside of the
pipe will be included in the dead weight of the system, and in the projected pipe area used for wind load
computations. If a negative value is entered for the insulation thickness, the program will model refractory
lined pipe. The thickness will be assumed to be the thickness of the refractory, inside the pipe.
Temperatures
There are nine temperature fields, to allow up to nine different operating cases. Temperature values are
checked (by the error checker) to insure they are within the code allowed ranges. Users can exceed the
code ranges by entering the expansion coefficient in the temperature field in units of length/length. The
expansion coefficient can be a useful method of modeling cold spring effects. Also when material 21(user-
defined material) enter temperature *expansion coefficient as in the example below.
Values entered in the temperature field whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance are taken
to be thermal expansion coefficients, where the Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file parameter and is
taken to be 0.05 by default. For example; if the user wanted to enter the thermal expansion coefficient
equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 12= .009475
This would be entered into the appropriate temperature field.
Note: A cut short is no more than reducing a pipe element's length to zero (for example; if we wanted
8.5 cm of cold spring we could put in an 8.5 cm long element and then thermally shrink its length to zero).
This allows cold spring to be manipulated as an individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated
force.
Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating Conditions input
screen, accessible via the Ellipses Dots button directly to the right of the standard Temperature and
Pressure input fields. This dialog box may be kept open or closed for the convenience of the user.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 9
Pressures
There are ten pressure fields, to allow up to nine operating, and one hydrotest, pressure cases. When
multiple pressures are entered, the user should be particularly careful with the set up of the analysis load
cases, and should inspect CAESAR II’s recommendations carefully before proceeding.
Access to operating pressures 3 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating Conditions input
screen, accessible via the Ellipses Dots button directly to the right of the standard Temperature and
Pressure input fields. This dialog box may be retained open or closed at the convenience of the user.
Entering a value in the HydroPress field signals CAESAR II to recommend a Hydrotest load case.
Piping Materials
Material Name
Materials are entered either by name or number. All available material names and their CAESAR II material
numbers are displayed in the drop list. Since this list is quite long, entering a partial material name (such
as A106) allows the user to select from matching materials. Numbers 1-17 correspond to the generic
materials, without code allowable stresses. Material 18 represents the cold spring element for “cut short”
and material 19 represents the cold spring element for “cut long.” Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass
Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. FRP Pipe requires slightly different material modeling and the spreadsheet
changes to accommodate the difference. Analysis of fiberglass pipe is described in greater detail in
Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual.
When a material has been selected from the database, the physical properties as well as the allowable
stresses are obtained and placed on the spreadsheet. At any later time, if the temperature or piping code is
changed, these allowable stress values are automatically updated.
Material Properties
Modulus of elasticity, Poisson’s ratio, and pipe density fields are automatically filled in when a material
number is entered. If the user wishes to override any material property extracted from the database, simply
by changing the value to be modified after the material number has been entered.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus of Elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus of Elasticity
h/a - Poisson’s ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop direction.
G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson’s ratio in the conventional
manner.)
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
FRP pipe is invoked from the CAESAR II element spreadsheet with a material type 20. The material name
will be immediately printed and FRP properties from the configuration file will be input on the
spreadsheet.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: “Elastic Modulus”
changes to “Elastic Modulus/axial” and “Poisson's Ratio” changes to “Ea/Eh*n h/a”. The latter entry
requires the value of the expression: (Ea*n h/a) / Eh (which happens to be equal to na/h, Poisson's ratio of
the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the axial direction). The shear modulus G can be
defined by entering the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to axial modulus) on the special execution
parameters screen. Only one ratio can be entered per job.
Because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher than the axial modulus for FRP pipe, the
decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular cross-section is
typically negligible, and so a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for these components. Similarly, since
the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe will likely have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3
is applied for all fittings. CAESAR II uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless specifically
overridden by the user. This can be overridden on a point-by-point basis, or by forcing all calculations to
adhere to the requirements of the governing code (through a CAESAR II configuration parameter). Note
that if the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, all SIFs and flexibility factors will be calculated as per
that code regardless of the configuration parameter settings.
Densities
Pipe Density
The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when a proper material number is input. This value
may be overridden by the user at any time. It will then be the user’s value that gets column-duplicated
through the remainder of the input.
Insulation Density
Enter the weight density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. (If the insulation thickness specified
above is negative, this field is the weight of the refractory lining, on a per unit volume basis.)
If left blank then CALCIUM SILICATE is assumed for insulation having a density of: ^^12 1H
,E10.4E1^6.655E-3
Insure that this "assumed" value is appropriate for the current application. Refractory densities are much
higher than insulation densities and could lead to under sized restraints. Sample density values for both
insulation and refractory materials are listed below.
MATERIAL DENSITY
(lb/cu.in.)
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 11
MATERIAL DENSITY
(lb./cu.in.)
A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94 .09433
A.P. GREEN KRUZITE CASTABLE .08681
A.P. GREEN MC-30 .08391
A.P. GREEN MC-22 .07234
A.P. GREEN KAST-SET .06655
A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25 .05208
A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94 .02257
Fluid Density
When the internal fluid the piping system transports would significantly effect the weight loads, the fluid
density should be specified. When the specific gravity of the fluid is known, it can be entered here instead
of the density, e.g. .85SG. Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on
input. Note that to enter specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces); this
value will then be converted to density.
Note: In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are entered in pounds per cubic inch.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 13
Radius
CAESAR II makes the long radius bend calculation whenever a bend is input. If the user wishes to use
some other bend radius the new bend radius can be entered in this field.
Type
For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges, and can be selected from the drop list. If
there are no flanges on the bend then leave the Type field blank. A bend should be considered “flanged” if
there is any heavy/rigid body within 2 diameters of the bend that will significantly restrict the bends
ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this entry
refers to the material laminate type, and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
Laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for the BS 7159
and UKOOA Codes only.
14 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Angle
Angle to a point on the bend curvature. The user may place additional nodes at any point on the bend
curvature provided the added nodes are not within 5 degrees of each other. (The 5 degree node-spacing
limit may be changed via the configuration file if necessary.) Note that the element To node is always
physically located at the far end of the bend. By default CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the
bend (Designated by the letter M in this field), as well as at the 0-degree position (start) of the bend if
possible.
Node
Node number to be associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places unique node numbers in
these fields whenever a bend is initiated. New, unique node numbers must be assigned to the points
whenever the user adds points on the bend curvature. If numbering by 5’s and the To node number for the
bend element is 35, a logical choice for the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend
would be 34. The added nodes on the bend can be treated like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes
on the bend curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg, or for the location
of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner will be plotted at the tangent intersection point for the
bend.
Miter Points
Number of cuts in the bend if mitered.
The bend SIF scratch pad may be invoked from the pipe spreadsheet by choosing Kaux - Review SIFs at
Bend Nodes. When the user enters a valid mitered bend node number, CAESAR II tells the user if the
mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be widely spaced and the
number of miter cuts is greater than 1, then it is recommended that the bend be broken down into “n”
single cut widely spaced miters, where “n” is the total number of cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and
the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined
in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R= S / (2 tan )
q= Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Fitting Thickness
Enter the thickness of the bend if different than the thickness of the matching pipe. If the entered thickness
is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside diameter of the bend will be smaller than
the inside diameter of the matching pipe. Section modulus calculations for stress computations are made
based on the properties of the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors -- once as Tn, and once
when determining the mean cross- sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the flexibility
characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
16 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value). More
specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.4 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.5 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching pipe Matching Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix calculations;
however, note that the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend stress calculations.
K-Factor
Normally the bend flexibility factor is calculated as per the requirements of the active code. The user can
override this calculation by entering a value in this field.
Seam-Welded
Used by the IGE/TD/12 piping code to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This directive is only available when the
IGE/TD/12 piping code is active.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 17
Rigid Elements
Activate by double-clicking the Rigid check box on the pipe element spreadsheet. Deactivate by double-
clicking a second time.
Enter the rigid element weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not include the
weight of any insulation or fluid.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.75 times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modelling constructs and do not have fluid or
insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe, i.e. a 13 in. long 12 in. diameter rigid
element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should be observed when
modelling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small pipe/heavy equipment model.
The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the entered thickness of the rigid element. For
additional details see Chapter 6 of this manual.
The length must be entered in the Delta Length field (DX, DY, DZ).
See the discussion of the valve and flange database (see "Valve/Flange Database" on page 67) for the
automatic input of these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Activate by double-clicking the Expansion Joint check box on the pipe element spreadsheet. Deactivate
by double-clicking a second time.
18 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
If the element length is zero then all stiffnesses should be defined by the user. If the element length is not
zero then either the bending or the transverse stiffness should be left blank. CAESAR II will automatically
calculate the stiffness not entered. (For rubber expansion joints, all stiffnesses may be entered.)
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II will use a default value of ^^15 1H
,E12.5^1.0E5
Bending "STIFFNESSES" from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are to be used
in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by (4) before being used in any piping
program. Bending "STIFFNESSES" from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
to be used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used without modification.
Use (1.0) for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use (1.0E12) for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero Length expansion joints can be used in many modelling applications to define struts, hinged ends,
etc. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the element that precedes the expansion
joint providing the "TO" node of the proceeding element is equal to the "FROM" node on the expansion
joint element. If the preceeding element does not go "INTO" the expansion joint, then the orientation will
be taken from the element that follows the expansion joint providing it properly "LEAVES" the joint.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 19
Effective ID
The effective inside diameter for pressure thrust (from the manufacturer’s catalog). For all load cases
including pressure CAESAR II will calculate the pressure “thrust force” tending to blow the bellows apart
(provided the pressure is positive). If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure will be
calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint: Aeff. The Effective ID is
calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
4 Sweepolet CROTCH
5 Weldolet CROTCH
11 Threaded Joint
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress intensification factors
to be 2.3 and 1.87, respectively, and the branch stress intensification factors to be equal to the code
recommended values, i.e. 6.70 and 5.58. To properly override the code-calculated stress intensification
factors for the header pipes, two pipe elements will have to be modified:
35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF(i): 2.3
SIF(o): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF(i): 2.3
SIF(o): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so, part of the
branch pipe spreadsheet might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF(i):
SIF(o):
If either of the SIF fields for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the code-calculated value
would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated values exist along with user-specified
values.
If the element from 110 to 115 is a reducer and the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is 2.0,
then a part of the reducer’s element spreadsheet might appear:
110 to 115 Node 110
Type:
SIF(i): 2.0
SIF(o):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF(i): 2.0
SIF(o):
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the in-plane stress
intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these user-input values.
The user is not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend elements
(unless the Allow User's Bend SIF directive is activated in the configuration file). Additionally, bend
stress intensification factors will supersede any code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors
for the same node. This characteristic allows the user to apply code-calculated intersection stress
intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing the normal bend stress intensification factors. The
node on the dummy leg, that is also on the bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection
SIF Scratchpad. The intersection stress intensification factors will be calculated and can be applied to the
dummy leg end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three pipes framing
into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the larger pipe is the header
and the smaller the branch.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 25
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full sized.
CAESAR II will not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more than three pipes
framing into it.
The stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II can be viewed interactively from the pipe
spreadsheet by selecting either the KAUX - REVIEW SIFS AT INTERSECTION NODES menu item or the KAUX -
REVIEW SIFS AT BEND NODES menu item. One of the following SIF scratchpads will appear after typing in the
node number to review when prompted. Note that the Node must be a valid Bend node when Reviewing
SIFs at Bends.
At this point the user may interactively change any of the spreadsheet data and recalculate the SIFs. This
allows the user to see the effect that changing geometries and properties have on code stress intensification
factors.
Note: CAESAR II gives the user the opportunity to transfer back to the actual model any data which
might be changed in the scratch pad.
Reducers
26 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Activate or deactivate this option by double-clicking on the Reducer check box on the piping element
spreadsheet.
Optionally, enter the TO END Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values of the reducer. The FROM
END diameter and wall thickness of the reducer element will be taken from the current piping element
spreadsheet.
CAESAR II will construct a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a successively
larger (or smaller) diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II will calculate SIFs
according to the current piping code (see Code Compliance Considerations in the CAESAR II Technical
Reference Manual for more information) and apply these internally to the Code Stress Calculations.
These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other code-specific
considerations), labeled Alpha in the figure above. If no Alpha is entered the program will calculate this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the entered element length. If entered, Diameter2
and Thickness2 will be carried forward when the next pipe element is created as Diameter and Wt/Sch. If
not specified, Diameter2 and Thickness2 will be assumed equal to those values entered as Diameter and
Wt/Sch on the following element spreadsheet.
The Piping Error Checker will report the value of alpha used by CAESAR II (see above picture) if no value
for alpha is entered on the input spreadsheet.
Diameter 2
Enter the 2nd diameter of the reducer element. (The 1st diameter is obtained from the diameter field of
the piping spreadsheet.)
Thickness 2
Enter the 2nd wall thickness of the reducer element. (The 1st wall thickness is obtained from the wall
thickness field of the piping spreadsheet.)
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 27
Alpha Angle
Define the reducer angle in degrees. If left blank, this value is determined by CAESAR II from the
difference in reducer diameters and 2/3 the reducer length.
R1
Enter the transition radius for the large end of the reducer, as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8.
R2
Enter the transition radius for the small end of the reducer, as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8.
28 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
If more than four restraints are to be specified on one element, the additional restraints may be placed on
any other input spreadsheet.
Note Do not use restraints in these three situations:
1) Imposed Displacements
Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement Auxiliary field.
2) Flexible Nozzles
Use the Nozzles check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data field to input the vessel or tank
characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to calculate local nozzle flexibilities. Once
these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II automatically inserts the necessary restraints and
flexibilities into the piping model.
3) Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers
Use the Hangers check box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data field.
Node
Node number where the restraint is to act.
Note: The node number does not have to be on the current element.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 29
CNode
Optional connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one node in the piping
system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint node is tied, via the restraint
stiffness, to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is specified then the restraint node is tied, via the
restraint stiffness, to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be used to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled via the setup file
directive Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 15). See Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference
Manual for additional information on this topic.
Type
The following restraints can be activated by selecting them from the drop list in the Restraint Auxiliary
field. The use of these restraints is detailed in Chapter 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Restraint Type Abbreviation
1 Anchor ANC
2 Translational Double Acting X, Y, or Z
3 Rotational Double Acting RX, RY, or RZ
4 Guide, Double Acting GUIDE
5 Double Acting Limit Stop LIM
6 Translational Double Acting Snubber XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
7 Translational Directional +X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z
8 Rotational Directional +RX, -RX, +RY, etc.
9 Directional Limit Stop +LIM,-LIM
10 Large Rotation Rod XROD, YROD, ZROD
11 Translational Double Acting BilinearX2, Y2, Z2
12 Rotational Double Acting Bilinear RX2, RY2, RZ2
13 Translational Directional Bilinear -X2, +X2, -Y2, etc.
14 Rotational Directional Bilinear +RX2,-RX2, +RY2, etc.
15 Bottom Out Spring XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR
16 Directional Snubber +XSNB,-XSNB,+YSNB, etc.
Anchor
Restraint is defined for “ALL” degrees of freedom at the node.
X , Y, or Z
Translational restraints may be preceded by a (+) or (-). If a sign is entered, it defines the direction of
allowed free displacement along the specified degree of freedom. (i.e. a +Y restraint is restraint against
movement in the minus -Y direction and is free to move in the plus Y direction).
RX, RY, or RZ
Rotational restraints may be preceded by a (+) or (-). If a sign is entered, it defines the direction of allowed
free displacement along the specified degree of freedom.
30 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Guide
Transverse restraint that may be skewed.
LIM
Limit stops are axial restraints that may be preceded by a (+) or (-). If a sign is entered, it defines the
direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal axis.
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Snubbers are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as those induced by a shock. They
only act on the piping system in the Occasional load case. Snubbers may be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
X2, Y2, Z2
Bilinear supports are restraints that have two different stiffnesses associated with them. The stiffness is
dependent upon the loading on the support. Bilinear supports may be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR
Spring supports that may be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)
Translational skewed restraints. May be preceded by a (+) or (-). If a direction vector is entered, i.e. vecx,
vecy, vecz, CAESAR II will convert the direction vector into the corresponding cosines.
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)
Rotational skewed restraints.
XROD, YROD, ZROD
Translational, large rotation, rod or hanger-type restraints. These types of supports are described in greater
detail in Chapter 6 of this manual.
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)
Translational skewed, large rotation rod or hanger type restraint.
Stif
:
If the restraint is rigid (1.0E12 lb./in. or as defined in the configuration file) the Stiffness field should be
left blank. If not rigid, then any non-negative value (preferably between 1.0 and 1015).
Gap
Distance along the restraint line of action the restrained node may move freely before resistance to
movement begins. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a sign, then the restraint is double
acting and the gap will be taken to exist for both positive and the negative displacements along the line of
action (i.e. if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y restraint, then the restrained node may move freely 0.25 in.
in the minus Y direction before restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free
displacement that can occur along the positive Y direction in this example).
When defining windows of allowed movement it is not uncommon to place two restraints having the same
line of action, but with different signs at the same node. This configuration is perfectly legal. The user is
cautioned to remember to form the window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. In
CAESAR II a gap is a measure of length and is always positive.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 31
Mu
Static friction coefficient, usually about 0.3. Restraint to sliding will be along the directions orthogonal to
the restraint line of action.
A friction coefficient may be automatically assigned to every new translational restraint by assigning a
value to the Coefficient of Friction field (see "Coefficient of Friction (Mu)" on page 5) in the
Configure/Setup module.
Hangers
Activate the hangers auxiliary by double-clicking on the check box. Deactivate by double-clicking a
second time.
Node
The node to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
The CNode, or connecting node number, is used only when the other end of the hanger is to be connected
to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Hanger Table
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked by further modifying the hanger table number:
Add + 100 to get Extended Range
Add + 200 to get Cold Load Design
Add + 400 to get the Hot load centered if possible.
For example, to use Grinnell Springs and cold load design the user would enter:
1 + 200 = 201.
To use Grinnell “Extended Range” springs, Cold Load Design, and to get the Design Hot load centered in
the middle of the hanger table, if possible, the user would enter:
1 + 100 + 200 + 400 = 701.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 33
A single job can use any combination of tables. The hanger table can be specified on the individual hanger
spreadsheet, or can be specified on the Hanger Run Control Spreadsheet (see "Hanger Data" on page
88).
If a spring table is entered in the Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet then it is used as the default for all
subsequent hangers defined. The Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet defaults to the hanger table-
specified in the configuration file.
The maximum load range was included in CAESAR II to permit the selection of less expensive variable
support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just outside the
manufacturers recommended range. Users should make sure that the maximum load range is available
from the manufacturer as a standard item.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design. Cold Load Spring Hanger Design is a method of designing the springs,
whereby the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of the piping. This
method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when the stops
are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
In some system configurations, operating loads on connected equipment are lower. A typical
configuration resulting in this “load-reduction” is one where a hot vertical riser, anchored at the
bottom, turns horizontally into a nozzle connection. The spring to be designed is at the elbow adjacent
to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot and cold loads
counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are
In some systems, in the hot condition the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
The decision to use hot or cold load hanger design rests with the user.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design. Many designers prefer that the hot load be centered as close as possible
to the middle of the spring table. This is to provide as much “variability” either way before the spring
bottoms out when the system is hot. This was a much more needed feature, before effective computer
modelling of piping systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or
calculated by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads will be at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II
design algorithm will go to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger
springs range, but will never switch spring types. This option can only result in a one size larger spring
when it is effective. CAESAR II will attempt to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within
10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory then the old one will
be used, even though its hot load is within 10% of the high end of the table load range, to get a springs hot
load close to the middle of the table.
Extended Load Range Springs. Extended load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table.
Some manufacturers build double spring supports to accommodate this range, and others adjust the top or
bottom travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Before using the maximum ranges,
the user should make sure that the manufacturer can properly supply the spring. Use of the extended range
often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support. Lisega springs do not support the "extended
range" idea. A request for extended Lisega springs results in the standard Lisega spring table and ranges.
34 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
This tells CAESAR II how much room, above or below the pipe, there is to install the hanger or can. If the
value entered by the user is negative, then CAESAR II will assume that a can is to be installed. If the value
entered is positive then CAESAR II will assume that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or cans will be
selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted. The precise definition
of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables for each manufacturer are shown at
the end of this section.
This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:
If the Available Space is not an important design criteria, then the field should be left blank or zero.
If the Available Space is positive, then the vertical clearance will be assumed to be above the pipe and a
hanger will be designed. If the Available Space is negative, then the vertical clearance will be assumed to
be below the pipe and a can will be designed.
When the Available Space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs are typically
chosen in place of one large spring.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 35
This is a parameter used to determine if there is sufficient travel to design a spring. The Rigid Support
Displacement Criteria is a cost saving feature that replaces springs that are not needed with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. From this case the load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined. Once the hanger design load is
known, an operating case is run with the hot hanger load installed to determine the travel at the hanger
location. If this determined hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria then a
rigid Y support is selected for the location instead of a spring.
If the Rigid Support Displacement is left blank or zero, the criteria will not be applied.
The Rigid Support Displacement Criteria may be specified on the Hanger Run Control Spreadsheet, or
on each individual hanger spreadsheet. The value specified on the Run Control Spreadsheet is used as the
default for all hangers not having it defined explicitly.
A typical value to be used is 0.1 in.
Important: In some cases a Single directional restraint should be inserted instead of a rigid rod. Rigid
rods are double acting restraints which can in some cases develop large “hold down” forces that don’t
really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod has bowed slightly. When this
condition develops the user should rerun the hanger design inserting single directional restraints where
rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Hangers should probably never be replaced by rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system that are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
36 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
To specify a limit on the amount of travel a variable support hanger may undergo, specify the limit in this
field. The specification of a maximum travel limit will cause CAESAR II to select a constant effort support
if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the manufacturer
table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
Constant effort hangers can be designed by inputting a very small number for the Maximum Allowed
Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 is typical to force CAESAR II to select a for a particular location.
To override the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating, enter the desired value in the Operating
Load field. This value is normally entered when the user thinks that loads on a piece of equipment will be
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a proportionately larger
part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load the hanger is designed to support after it
undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of the piping. CAESAR II’s calculated hanger operating
loads may be read from the hanger table printed in the output processor. The column title is “HOT
LOAD.” The user’s entered value will similarly show up in this table if defined. The total desired
operating load at the location should be entered. If there are two hangers specified at the location and each
should carry 500 lb., then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 37
Free Code
Whenever an anchor or restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, that anchor’s node
number should be put in the Free Anchor/Restraint at Node field, and the Free Code describing the
directions to be released should be put in the Free Code field on the same hanger spreadsheet. Free Codes
are
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X, Y, Z, RX, RY,
and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but should only be used when the
horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about 4 pipe diameters.
40 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The spring rate and the theoretical cold load effectively define a hanger location. If the user enters both,
then the hanger location will be completely pre-defined by the user and no analysis level design for the
hanger will take place.
Re-setting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers
If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II will assume that the user wants to re-rate the spring at the given
location. The old spring rate should be read from the existing hanger and input directly to CAESAR II. The
Theoretical Cold Load field should be left blank for the re-rate. If more than a single spring exists at the
location, then the total number of springs should be entered in the No. of Hangers field (CAESAR II
assumes that the load is distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point).
CAESAR II will go through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and travel for all
proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be re-set. The stiffness of the re-set
springs will not be used for this re-design. Once CAESAR II sizes the springs, a comparison will be made
with the user-entered spring rates. If the program's selected spring rate is within 5% of the user's existing
spring rate, CAESAR II will list the spring's figure number and size in the output report. If the selected
spring rate is more than 5% off the users value, no manufacturer's data will be listed. In either case,
CAESAR II will use the user-entered spring rate in all following analyses. It is up to the user to confirm that
the new hot and cold loads are within the existing spring's working range.
The major use of the re-rate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs might be re-
rated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long period, or after
mechanical or process changes have been made to a piping system.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 41
Nozzles
Activate by double-clicking the Nozzles check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet and selecting the
WRC 297 radio button from the Nozzle Auxiliary Data field. Deactivate by double-clicking a second
time.
When a nozzle node number is input, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and loads its
diameter and wall thickness and enters it in the Nozzle Auxiliary Data field.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council Bulletin No.
297, issued August 1984 for cylinder to cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its degrees of
freedom.
Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis via program
generated restraints. This generation is completely transparent to the user. Six restraints are established for
each flexible nozzle input.
If a vessel node number is defined, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each of the six
restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle nodes.
Note: The user should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any specified
vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility data and any user
generated stiffnesses between these two points will add erroneously to the nozzle stiffnesses.
During the error checking of the nozzle flexibilities, all useful WRC curve data is displayed on the
terminal. These values may be used to enter the illustrated nozzles in the WRC 297 bulletin. It is
sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the several asymptotic limits, or
to a curve boundary.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 43
Note: The user will only be able to see the WRC 297 computed data during the error checking process
with warning messages activated.
Each input item on the nozzle spreadsheet is discussed in detail as follows:
Nozzle Node Number
Node that is located at the nozzle’s intersection with the vessel shell. There should only be a single piping
element connected to this node, and there should be no restraints acting on the node. The nozzle element
should be perpendicular to the vessel shell. Hillside nozzles and latrolets can still be modeled; however,
the first (possibly very short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel should be perpendicular to the
vessel to keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on
the true centerline of the nozzle.
Vessel Node Number
Node on the vessel/tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the vessel shell. The vessel/tank
node is optional, and if not given the nozzle node is connected via the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in
space. If the vessel node is given, the nozzle node will be connected via the stiffnesses to the vessel node.
Vessel nodes are specified when the user wishes to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection
to the skirt or foundation.
Nozzle Diameter
Outside diameter of the nozzle. (Does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the
nozzle.)
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Wall thickness of the nozzle. (Does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to
model the nozzle.)
Vessel Diameter
Wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel. Do not include the
thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness
Thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the vessel wall thickness before
nozzle stiffness calculations are performed.
Distance to Stiffener or Head
Distance along the vessel center-line, from the center of the nozzle opening in the vessel shell to the
closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the cross-section of the vessel against local
deformation normal to the shell surface.
44 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Distance from the center of the nozzle opening in the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the
vessel on the other side of the nozzle. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel centerline direction vector X, Y, Z
Direction vector or direction cosines which define the center-line of the vessel. For a vertical vessel this
entry would read:
Vessel centerline direction vector X:<blank>
Vessel centerline direction vector Y: 1.0
Vessel centerline direction vector Z:<blank>
Note: The centerlines of the nozzle and vessel cannot be collinear or CAESAR II will flag this as an error.
Estimated temperature of the vessel/nozzle junction. If input, the vessel temperature must be paired with a
valid vessel material number. The estimated temperature is used to calculate the hot modulus of elasticity.
Vessel Material No. (Optional)
If input, the vessel material number must be paired with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel
material number can be any valid material number from the material database and corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the spreadsheet. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are left blank
or zero, an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi will be used.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to appendix P of API 650, "Design of Carbon
Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
Nozzle Node Number
Node that is located at the nozzle’s intersection with the vessel shell. There should only be a single piping
element connected to this node, and there should be no restraints acting on the node. The nozzle element
should be perpendicular to the vessel shell. Hillside nozzles and latrolets can still be modeled; however,
the first (possibly very short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel should be perpendicular to the
vessel to keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on
the true centerline of the nozzle.
Tank Node Number
Node on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the vessel/tank shell.
The tank node is optional, and if not given the nozzle node is connected via the API stiffnesses to a point
fixed rigidly in space. If the tank node is given, the nozzle node will be connected via the API stiffnesses
to the tank node.
Tank nodes are specified when the user wishes to model through the tank from the nozzle connection to
the foundation.
Nozzle Diameter
Outside diameter of the nozzle. (Does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the
nozzle.)
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Wall Thickness of the Nozzle. May be different than the attached pipe wall thickness
46 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Outside Diameter of the Vessel or API 650 storage tank. Note that API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.
API-650 Tank Wall Thickness
Wall Thickness of the Vessel at the point where the Nozzle connects to the vessel. DO NOT include the
thickness of any reinforcing pad.
API 650 Reinforcing 1 or 2
For API tanks, if the reinforcing is on the shell, then enter 1. If it is on the nozzle, enter a 2.
API 650 Nozzle Height
For API 650 applications, enter the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
API 650 Fluid Height
Enter the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This fluid level must be greater than the nozzle
height.
API 650 Specific Gravity
Enter the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
API-650 Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank is constructed. Values are listed
in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this value is left blank, zero
will be assumed.
API 650 Delta T
Enter the change in temperature from ambient to its maximum that the tank normally experiences. For
example: If the maximum summertime temperature is 107°F. The delta T would be 107 - 70 = 37°F. If this
value is left blank, zero will be assumed.
API-650 Tank Modulus of Elasticity
For API 650 nozzles, the hot modulus of elasticity of the tank must be entered directly. If this value is left
blank, 29.5E6 will be assumed.
PD 5500 Nozzles
Activate by double-clicking the Nozzles check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet and selecting the PD
5500 radio button from the Nozzle Auxiliary Data field. Deactivate by double-clicking the check box a
second time.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 47
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500 Specification for
Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels. The input requirements for these nozzles are:
Nozzle Node Number
Node that is located at the nozzle’s intersection with the vessel shell. There should only be a single piping
element connected to this node, and there should be no restraints acting on the node. The nozzle element
should be perpendicular to the vessel shell. Hillside nozzles and latrolets can still be modeled; however,
the first (possibly very short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel should be perpendicular to the
vessel to keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on
the true centerline of the nozzle.
Vessel Node Number
Node on the vessel/tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the vessel shell. The vessel/tank
node is optional, and if not given the nozzle node is connected via the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in
space. If the vessel node is given, the nozzle node will be connected via the stiffnesses to the vessel node.
Vessel nodes are specified when the user wishes to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection
to the skirt or foundation.
Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or Sphere (1)
If the vessel is cylindrical, enter a 0. For cylinders, the distances to stiffeners/heads and the vessel
direction cosines are required. If the vessel is spherical, enter a 1. For spheres, the fields for the distances
to stiffeners/heads and vessel direction cosines are both ignored.
Nozzle Diameter
Outside diameter of the nozzle. (Does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the
nozzle.)
Vessel Diameter
Wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel. Do not include the
thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness
Thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the vessel wall thickness before
nozzle stiffness calculations are performed.
Distance to Stiffener or Head
Distance along the vessel center-line, from the center of the nozzle opening in the vessel shell to the
closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the cross-section of the vessel against local
deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite-Side Stiffener or Head
Distance from the center of the nozzle opening in the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the
vessel on the other side of the nozzle. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosines
These are direction vectors or direction cosines that define the center-line of the vessel. For a horizontal
vessel aligned with the “X” axis, this entry would read:
Vessel centerline direction vector X ..... 1.0
Vessel centerline direction vector Y ..... <Blank>
Vessel centerline direction vector Z ..... <Blank>
Note: The centerlines of the nozzle and vessel cannot be co-linear or CAESAR II will flag this as an error.
This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Estimated temperature of the vessel/nozzle junction. If input, the vessel temperature must be paired with a
valid vessel material number. The estimated temperature is used to calculate the hot modulus of elasticity.
Vessel Material No. (Optional)
If input, the vessel material number must be paired with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel
material number can be any valid material number from the material database and corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the spreadsheet. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are left blank
or zero, an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi will be used.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 49
Displacements
Activate by double-clicking the Displacements check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet. Deactivate
by double-clicking the Displacements check box a second time.
Enter the node number where the displacement is to be specified. There must not be a restraint at this
node.
Enter the displacements at the node. Any displacement direction not specified for any displacement vector
will be free.
To specify an anchor at node 1000 with a 1/2-in. displacement in the minus Y direction for displacement
set #1, enter data as shown in the figure above.
The displacements at a node can be specified for up to 9 different vectors, intended to correspond to the 9
temperature cases.
Note: If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, that degree-of-freedom
will be considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they contain that displacement set.
50 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Activate by double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet. Deactivate
by double-clicking the check box a second time.
Enter the node number where the forces and/or moments are to act.
Enter the magnitudes of the forces and/or moments. Up to 9 different force vectors can be defined at each
node point.
Uniform Loads
Activate by double-clicking the Uniform Loads check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet.
Deactivate by double-clicking the check box a second time.
The uniform load specification is distributive, and will act on all following elements until zeroed or
changed. A snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds per inch) could be entered:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
UX
UY -8/12
UZ
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 51
or may be entered:
UX
UY -.6667
UZ
UX, UY, and UZ can be changed to GX, GY, and GZ so that uniform loads can be entered as a fraction of
the total pipe weight through the Kaux- Special Execution Parameters (see "Uniform Load in G's" on
page 97) command. The GX, GY, and GZ specifications are used most frequently for defining static
earthquake loadings.
Note: Up to 3 uniform load vectors can be defined.
Wind Loads
Activate by double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet. Deactivate by
double-clicking the check box a second time.
This is a shape factor as defined in ASCE #7. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical
sections. Activating the wind directive will enable the Wind Load Input Spreadsheets, which are accessed
from the Load Case Editor during the Static Analysis. This auxiliary is used to define the presence of
wind loads (via the wind shape factor as defined in ASCE #?) or wave loads (with associated coefficients).
The load type may be set or turned off via the radio button.
Important: This value is distributive, and will act on all following elements until changed or turned
off.
Wave Loads
Activate by double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Pipe Element Spreadsheet. Deactivate by
double-clicking the check box a second time.
52 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Important: These values are distributive, and will act on all following elements until changed or
turned off.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6 to 1.20. Entering a 0.0 instructs
CAESAR II to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca
This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from
0.5 to 1.0. Entering a 0.0 instructs CAESAR II to calculate the added mass coefficient based on particle
velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
This coefficient accounts for wave lift, which is the force perpendicular to both the element axis and the
particle velocity vector. Entering a 0.0 instructs CAESAR II to calculate the added lift coefficient based on
particle velocities.
Marine Growth
The thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. This will increase the pipe
diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Marine Growth Density
An entry in this field designates the density to be used if including the weight of the marine growth in the
pipe weight. If left blank, the weight of the marine growth will be ignored.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 53
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary field incorporates piping codes with their associated inputs. The help
screens should be used liberally to be sure that the proper interpretation of each new input data cell is
made. A CAESAR II Piping Spreadsheet illustrating the Allowable Stress field is shown above.
Note: Allowable stress data is distributive, and applies to all following elements unless changed or
zeroed.
Codes
The piping codes are listed in the following table. Their current publication dates can be found in the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.5 RCC-M C
B31.8 RCC-M D
54 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
BS 806 DNV
Each of the input data cells are discussed in general in the following section. For more information about
code compliance consideration see Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 55
SC
Typically the cold allowable stress for the specific material taken directly from the governing piping code.
The value of SC will usually be divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See
the notes that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1. Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where
applicable. These efficiencies should not be used for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint efficiency
(Eff) is given on this spreadsheet CAESAR II will divide the entered SC by the joint efficiency before using
it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3. Values from tables in Appendix A don’t include the joint efficiency. Eff should be zero, blank, or
one. Note that the 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies as part of the
tables in Appendix A. If this version of the code is being used then Eff should be entered in the
appropriate field on this spreadsheet.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX. SC is not used!!! The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken from
Table 1 in the appendix. (See the Sy data field on this spreadsheet.)
B31.5. Values from tables in Appendix A don’t include the joint efficiency. Eff should be zero, blank, or
one.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII. SC is not used!!! The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. (See the Sy data field.)
B31.11. SC is not used!!! The only stress value used in B31.11 is the yield stress.
ASME NC and ND. SC is taken directly from Appendix I. “Eff” is not used, and is ignored if entered.
Navy 505. There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied in
Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given CAESAR II will divide SC by the joint efficiency
before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should probably be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662. SC is not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the standards or
specification under which the pipe was purchased. (See the Sy data field.)
BS 806. 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. “Eff” is not used in BS 806 and is
ignored if entered.
Swedish Method 1. SC is not used. Method 1 only uses either the yield, or creep rupture stress at
temperature, (SHn and Fn respectively on this spreadsheet.) “Eff” is used, but is the Circumferential weld
joint efficiency and has a completely different meaning.
Swedish Method 2. SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. “Eff” is not used, and
is ignored if entered.
B31.1 (1967). SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A. These tables
include the Longitudinal Weld joint efficiencies where applicable. These efficiencies should not be used
for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint efficiency “Eff” is given CAESAR II will divide the entered SC
by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989). SC is the yield stress at room temperature, referred to as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D. SC is taken from Appendix, “Eff” is not used, and is ignored if entered.
CODETI. This is "famb" from the code. “Eff” is not used, and is ignored if entered.
Norwegian. This is "f1" from the code. “Eff” is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159. SC is not used. Design stress is entered in the SH fields.
UKOOA. SC is not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is entered in the SH fields.
IGE/TD/12. SC is not used.
DNV. SC is not used.
56 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
SH
Typically the hot allowable stress for the specific material taken directly from the governing piping code.
A value must be entered for each defined temperature case. The value of SH will usually be divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the recommendations that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1. Allowable stress from Appendix A, see SC above.
B31.3. Allowable stress from Appendix A, see SC above.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX . SH is not used.
B31.5. Allowable stress from Appendix A, see SC above.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII . SH is used for the minimum wall thickness computations only.
B31.11.. SH is not used.
ASME NC and ND. Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505. Allowable stress from Table XIIA. See SC above.
CAN Z662. SH is not used.
BS 806. SH is 0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. (Eff is not used.)
Swedish Method 1. SH is the yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2. SH is the allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967). Allowable stress from Appendix A, see SC above.
Stoomwezen. SH is the yield stress at design temperature, referred to as Re (um) in the code.
RCC-M C, D. SH is taken from the Appendix.
CODETI. This is “f” from the code.
Norwegian. This is “"f2” from the code.
FDBR. The hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159. This is the design stress sd, in the longitudinal direction, as defined in Section 4.3 of the code,
i.e.: sd = Sd * Elamx. Design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction should be specified by entering
the ratio of the circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff field below. (Note that
since design strain should be the same for both directions, the entry in the Eff field will also be ratio of
Elamf (hoop) to Elamx (longitudinal).
UKOOA. This is the allowable design stress in the hoop direction, defined in the code as f1 * LTHS. The
three “HOT ALLOWABLE STRESS” fields correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12. Yield Stress is used here instead of a Hot Allowable Stress.
Sy - Yield Stress at Temperature
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of |the pipe material at maximum
temperature.
Note: Unless explicitly entered by the user, this value will be taken from the Material Database, if
available and applicable.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 57
Fn
This input is the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes. Exceptions are noted as follows:
CAN Z662. F1 is the location factor, as defined in Table 4.1. F2 is the temperature derating factor, obtained
from Table 4.3 of the code.
BS 806. Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1 to F9 correspond to the nine possible
thermal states.
Swedish Method 1. Creep Rupture Stress at temperature. F1 to F9 correspond to the nine possible thermal
states.
Stoomwezen. F1 is the average creep stress to produce one percent set, referred to as Rrg in the code. F2 is
the average creep tensile stress to produce rupture, referred to as Rmg in the code. F3 is the minimum
creep tensile stress to produce rupture, referred to as Rmmin in the code.
BS 7159. The term used in this code is the fatigue factor, Kn, and is used inversely compared to other
codes (so its value is greater than 1.0). Kn is calculated as:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
sn = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA. This is the ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is
defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of the
operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12. This is the UTS value.
UTS - Ultimate Tensile Strength of Material
Eff
The longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The use of this parameter by CAESAR II varies with the piping
code. Depending upon code requirements, the allowable stress may be either divided by Eff for use in the
flexibility calculations or multiplied by Eff for use in the minimum wall calculations. The following
describes the effect of the longitudinal joint efficiency for each of the piping codes.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5. Allowable stress tables include Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiencies where
applicable. If Eff is entered, values for SC and SH will be divided by Eff before being used in the
flexibility calculations. Eff will be ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e), CODETI (z), FDBR (vl). Allowable
stress (or yield stress) tables do not include Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiencies, Eff will be ignored for
the flexibility calculations. SH will be multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D. Eff is ignored for
both flexibility and minimum wall thickness calculations, and therefore the field is disabled for these code.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6. Eff is the circumferential joint factor z and is
used in the calculation of the code stresses, rather than in the calculation of the allowables (either for
flexibility or minimum wall thickness).
Stoomwezen. For this code, this Eff is the cyclic reduction factor, referred to as Cf in the code. Weld
joint efficiency is not considered for this code in CAESAR II.
BS 7159. This code replaces this field with Eh/Ea, the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of
elasticity. If omitted, a default value of 1.0 is used, as though the material is isotropic.
UKOOA, IGE/TD/12. These codes replace this field with f2 and Dfac, respectively, the system design
factor (typically 0.67).
DNV. This code replaces this field with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The
value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
Design Factor (Unitless)
This is the system design factor, as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. It should normally fall
between 0.3 and 0.67.
Note: Unless explicitly entered by the user, this value will |be taken from the material database, if available
and applicable.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 59
Sy
This is a code-specific field, generally requiring input only for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
Code-specific input requirements are described as follows:
B31.1. Not used.
B31.3. Not used.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX . Taken from Table 1 in the Appendix.
B31.5. . Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses ferrous
materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value entered here should be the quantity (40%
of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE case will be considered a "stress
case". The allowable reported in the output report will be the value entered here. The computed operating
stress will include all longitudinal components, and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII. Taken from Appendix 5.
B31.11. . Specified Minimum Yield Stress.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 . Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use in Eqn. 9 for
consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must be satisfied in
separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II configuration file. If the
occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor
is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY, while if the factor is 2.0, the allowable is
the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. (Note, in order to satisfy the code SH should be replaced by SM
for the latter two.)
Navy 505. Not used.
CAN Z662. Specified Minimum Yield Strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the
pipe was purchased or as per clause 4.3.3.
BS 806. Sustained Stress Limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture design
stress value defined in Appendix A under cold or any other operating condition. See 17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1. Not Used. The yield stress at temperature is entered in the respective SHn fields for the
up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2. Ultimate Tensile Strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967). Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989). SY is the tensile strength at room temperature, referred to as Rm in the code.
RCC-M C, D. Not used.
CODETI. Not used.
Norwegian. This should be the allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If not
entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR. Not used.
BS 7159. Not used.
UKOOA. Not used.
IGE/TD/12. Specified minimum yield stress (SMYS).
60 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
This is SMYS, or Sy, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature.
Note: Unless explicitly entered by the user, this value will be taken from the Material Database, if
available and applicable.
Fac
A unitless multiplication factor used by some transmission and non-U.S. piping codes. The specific input
required for each piping code is discussed as follows:
B31.1. Not used.
B31.3. Not used.
B31.4. Amount the pipeline may be considered under complete axial restraint, i.e. long and buried. This
option is used primarily when the user is adding bending stresses to the stresses already developed in the
pipeline due to its buried restraint. This condition occurs when, for example a branch is tieing into a long
buried header and the soil supports are not modeled. The equation for stress in CAESAR II is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E (T2-T1) + (1- ) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson’s ratio
Shoop= hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 61
Fac should be a number between zero and one. One, when the pipe is fully restrained, i.e. buried for a long
distance. Zero when the pipe is subject to no buried axial restraint. The default value for Fac is 0.0. Note
that when Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have
been modeled. This will cause the hoop stress component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added
to the operating stresses, conforming to the spirit of the restrained line stress calculation above.
B31.4 Chapter IX. This value is F1, Hoop Stress Design Factor, as per Table A402.3.5(a) of B31.4.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for Pipelines or 0.60 for Platform piping and Risers.
B31.5. Not used.
B31.8. Construction Design Factor, from Table 841.114B.
Construction type: (Descriptions are approx.) FACTOR
A (CLASS 1) Wasteland, Deserts, Mountains, 0.72
Grazing Land, Farmland, Sparsely Populated Areas.
B (CLASS 2) Fringe Areas Around Cities, 0.60
Industrial Areas, Ranch or Country Estates.
C (CLASS 3) Suburban Housing Developments, 0.50
Shopping Centers, Residential Areas.
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are 0.40
prevalent, Traffic is heavy and where there
may be numerous other utilities underground.
(0.4 is the default if not entered.)
B31.8 Chapter VIII. This value is F1, Hoop Stress Design Factor, as per Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for Pipelines or 0.50 for Platform piping and Risers.
B31.11. Amount the pipeline may be considered to be under complete axial restraint (see discussion under
B31.4 above).
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3. Not used.
B31.1 (1967). Not used.
Navy 505. Not used
CAN Z662. Indicates whether the pipe is restrained (i.e. long or buried) or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E (T2-T1) + (1- ) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson’s ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
62 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. One, for pipe under complete axial restraint.One, when the pipe is fully
restrained, i.e. buried for a long distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. Note that when Fac is 0.001,
this indicates to CAESAR II that the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes
the hoop stress component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the
axial stress is compressive.
BS806. Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1. Sigma(tn) multiplier. Usually 1.5. For prestressed (cold sprung) piping
this value should be 1.35. The default used is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2. Not used.
Stoomwezen. This is a constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. Refer to Stoomwezen Section 5.2 for
details.
RCC-M C, D. Not used.
CODETI. Not used.
Norwegian. This should be the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If not entered,
this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR. This cell can be used to over-ride the ratio of Ehot/Ecold, which is automatically determined by
CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress, based on the material and
temperature. Normally, this field can be left blank. However, if desired, a value (greater than zero and less
than one) can be entered in this field to over-ride the program determined ratio.
To correctly utilize the FBDR code, the user should enter the Hot Modulus in the “Elastic Modulus” cell
of the spreadsheet. CAESAR II will look up the Cold Modulus and compute this necessary ratio. Note that
the use of the Hot Modulus in the flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code
in
CAESAR II.
Note that if expansion coefficients are entered directly instead of temperatures, the program cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, a value of 1.0 should be entered in this cell and the cyclic reduction factor
fields should be used to specify the product of
( f * Ehot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159. Mean temperature change multiplier k, as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This should be
0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank, this value will
default to 1.0.
UKOOA. Mean temperature change multiplier k, as defined for the BS 7159 code above. If left blank, this
value will default to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12. Material shakedown factor Ksd, as specified in Table 5 of the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
DNV. Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64 and 0.84.
Ksd. (Factor) (Unitless)
This is the material shakedown factor described in Table 5 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Steel 1.8
Austenitic steel 2.0
Aluminum 1.8
Non-ferrous metals 1.0
Note: Unless explicitly entered by the user, this value will be taken from the material database, if available
and applicable.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 63
Pvar
This input is only used for the RCC-M, ASME Sect. III NC and ND, and DNV piping codes, the Swedish
Power Piping, and the Norwegian codes:
ASME and RCC-M C, D. This is the variance in the pressure between operating and “peak” to be used as the
component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not enter the peak pressure for Pvar,
enter the difference between the operating pressure and the peak pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2. This is BETA for the “Seff” calculation. If not given, “beta” defaults
to 10%. Ten percent would be entered as 10.0. Values entered must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values
entered outside of this range will be automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed range. The
definition for “beta,” as given in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the “maximum allowable
minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness.”
Stoomwezen. PVAR is the Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian. PVAR is the difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure Pmaks
(in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping code (V) or not
required (N).
DNV. Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between 0.77 and 1.00.
Material Fatigue Curve data may be entered here, permitting the evaluation of fatigue load cases and
cumulative usage scenarios. Cycle vs. Stress data may be entered for Butt Weld or Fillet Weld components
(currently only the IGE/TD/12 code differentiates between the two; all other codes use only the Butt Weld
values). Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by the IGE/TD/12 code; they are available as
extensions to other codes.
The user is also given the option of reading in fatigue curve data from a file, several of which are provided
with CAESAR II.
Cycle/Stress pairs should be entered in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Stresses should be entered
in units of ^06. Fatigue Curves should be entered with logarithmic interpolation.
Note: Fatigue Curves may also be read in from files, using the READ FROM FILE button.
Note: Static FATigue cases will be evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while dynamic
FATigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated against half of the range
of the fatigue curve.
Archive Password
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 65
Available Commands
Break Command
This command is initiated with the Model - Break command. This option is available from the pipe
spreadsheet and allows the user to “break” an element into two or more individual elements. The “break”
option was designed for situations where:
A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or some other
change in properties.
A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with similar
support conditions on each length, i.e. a long straight run of rack piping, or a buried run with multiple
soil supports at each point in the run.
An example “break” screen is shown in the following figure:
66 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The example above illustrates a “single element insert” between the nodes 100 and 110. The node to be
inserted is 105 and is 6 ft. from the node 100. If there was some other node in the model with a restraint
(or imposed displacements) like the one to be put on the newly generated node 105, then the node
identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line “Get support from Node,” and the restraint
would be automatically placed at 105.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the prompts might appear as follows:
At the prompt for “support condition” if the user entered the node where a +Y restraint had already been
defined, a +Y restraint would be placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert BREAK is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and entered directly when
requested at the “break” prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of the individual
elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Note: There are two occasions when “Break” will not work:
• The element is an expansion joint.
• The delta dimensions in the DX, DY, and DZ fields are blank or zero.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 67
Valve/Flange Database
The Valve and Flange database is accessed through the Model - Valve command.
There are four databases currently provided:
CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx/PIPE (this is the CAESAR II default)
The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog. The
GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases (i.e. weights for
control valves) information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In these cases the
largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases only the length of the fitting
was available.
The default database, the CADWorx/Pipe database, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx/Pipe, COADE’s piping design and drafting program. This database offers nine different
component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, and butterfly valves; flange pair and single
flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded, or socket). Selection of flanged-
end components or flanges themselves automatically provides for gaskets.
Note: Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two flanges and
gaskets to the valve length and weight. No FLG selects a valve without including the two mating flanges.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. The user should note that
CAESAR II is doing a table lookup based on line size, and is inserting the selected table values into the
spreadsheet. Should the line size change at some later time, the user must come back and ask CAESAR II to
perform another table look-up for the new sizes.
Use of the CADWorx/Pipe database offers several benefits over use of the other databases:
The CADWorx/Pipe database provides more accurate component lengths and weights than those
typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx/Pipe modeling promotes the efficiency
of the bi-directional interface between the two programs, for those who are using both programs. Total
sharing of data files and specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx/Pipe occurs when the
CADWorx program installation directive is saved in the registry. In that case, the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file should be edited to name the actual CADWorx specifications (located in the
CADWORX\SPEC subdirectory). For more information on editing this file, see below.
Users may more easily modify the CADWorx/Pipe valve and flange database, since the specification
files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves possibly editing the
CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as such:
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 69
More extensive information on editing of these files can be found in the CADWorx/Pipe User Manual.
Find Distance
Click Origin and Current Node to calculate the distance between coordinate (0.0,0.0,0.0) and the TO
node of the current element.
Click Nodes, and then enter two node numbers to calculate the distance between those two nodes.
Find Element
Enter a single node number to find the next element containing that node number (either as a FROM or
TO node).
Enter two node numbers to find the next element containing BOTH of those node numbers (in either
order).
Global Coordinates
Enter absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system segment. This may be
required for three reasons:
1 -- the user may wish to show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 71
2 -- defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allow the piping segments to plot in the
correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3 -- if WIND loading is present, it is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation.
Insert Element
Selecting BEFORE inserts a new element prior to the current element, with the FROM node equal to the
FROM node of the current element.
Selecting AFTER inserts a new element following the current element, with the FROM node equal to the
TO node of the current element.
Node Increment
When generating the FROM and TO nodes for new elements, CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
CONFIGURE/SETUP. This may be overridden by entering a different value here.
Thickness of the REINFORCING PAD for reinforced fabricated tees, Intersection type 1.
Note: In most piping codes this beneficial effect of the pad's thickness is limited to pads of a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z662, and is
2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
Crotch Thickness for B31.3 Welding Tees and Sweepolets (intersection types 3 and 4). The crotch
thickness and radius are necessary for CAESAR II to determine if the fitting meets B16.9 requirements.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 73
The largest fitting outside radius for branch connections. Used for reduced branch connections in the
ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and for WRC329 intersection SIF
calculations. SETUP file directions allow these calculations to be incorporated into most piping codes as
an option.
SETUP file directives also exist to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
UNREINFORCED FABRICATED TEES, SWEEPOLETS, WELDOLETS and EXTRUDED WELDING
TEES. (i.e. omitting REDUCED WELDING TEES and REDUCED REINFORCED FABRICATED
TEES.) If omitted, FTG ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch connection if omitted.
Crotch Radius
Weld d (Mismatch)
Average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the pipe. Used for Butt Welds
and Tapered Transitions.
Note: THIS IS THE AVERAGE, AND NOT THE MAXIMUM MISMATCH. USERS MUST VERIFY
THAT ANY MAXIMUM MISMATCH REQUIREMENTS ARE SATISFIED FOR THEIR
PARTICULAR CODE.
This value is used in the sif equations as follows:
For B31.1:
IF( TR.GE. 0.237 .AND. DMIS/TR .LE. 0.13 ) THEN
S = 1.0
ELSE IF( TR .LT. 0.237 .AND. DMIS/TR .LE. 0.33 ) THEN
S = 0.9 + 2.7*DMIS/TR
IF( S .GT. 1.9 ) S = 1.9
IF( S .LT. 1.0 ) S = 1.0
ELSE IF( TR .GE. 0.237 ) THEN
S = 0.9 + 2.7*DMIS/TR
IF( S .GT. 1.9 ) S = 1.9
IF( S .LT. 1.0 ) S = 1.0
ELSE
OUT OF THE RANGES FOR B31.1 USE THE MAX. SIF
S = 1.9
END IF
Where TR is the pipe thickness (inches), and DMIS is the entered weld mismatch. See Table D1 in
the B31.1 appendix for a further discussion and assumptions.
For B31.3, B31.4, B31.8 (including Ch VIII), BS 806, Canadian, Navy and B31.1-1967:
The sif for girth butt welds is always taken as 1.0 regardless of the input for thickness and mismatch.
For ASME III NC or ND codes:
IF( TR .GE. 0.237 ) THEN
S = 1.0
ELSE
S = 0.9 * ( 1.0 + 3.0*DMIS/TR )
IF( S .GT. 1.9 ) S = 1.9
IF( S .LT. 1.0 ) S = 1.0
END IF
For the Swedish and Norwegian codes:
IF( TR .GT. 4.5mm .AND. DMIS/TR .LE. 0.1 ) THEN
S = 1.0
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 75
This parameter is used when calculating SIFs of socket welds (type 8 or 9) when the B31.3, ASME-III
Subsection NC or ND codes (3, 12, or 13) are in effect. Note: If a fillet leg size is entered, both socket
weld types result in the same sif.
The sif is calculated as (2.1)(T) / Leg, where T is the pipe wall thickness and Leg is the fillet leg length. A
minimum sif of 1.3 required.
For an unequal leg fillet weld, use the length of the shorter leg.
Header Pipe Outside Diameter
Enter the thickness of the bend if not equal to the thickness of the matching pipe. Increased fitting
thicknesses result in SMALLER INSIDE pipe diameters.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors -- once as Tn, and once
when determining the mean cross- sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the flexibility
characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r¦)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
78 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value). More
specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.4 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.5 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching pipe Matching Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix calculations;
however, note that the thickness of the matching pipe (wt) is always used in the bend stress calculations.
Miter Points
Number of CUTS (or changes of direction) in the mitered bend.
The "NUMBER OF CUTS" and the "BEND RADIUS" are the only inputs required (along with the
program-determined bend angle) to calculate the SIF'S and flexibilities defined in the various piping
codes for mitered elbows.
The RADIUS of the bend and the spacing of the cuts are directly related to one another, given one, the
other can be calculated. Closely spaced miters typically have a radius equivalent to the standard long
radius bend for the given pipe size.
Closely spaced mitered bends, regardless of the number of miter |cuts can be modelled as a single bend
element.
Widely spaced mitered bends should be modelled as "n" single cut miters, where "n" is the number of
cuts in the bend. This means that "n" bend elements should be defined, each one a single cut miter. The
bend radius associated with these individual, single cut miters is smaller than the standard long radius
bend and must be calculated separately. Examples in the CAESAR II user's Guide illustrate this
application.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 79
Enter the outside diameter of the matching pipe in the units shown.
This is used in the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the "mean radius of matching pipe".
Wall Thickness of Matching Pipe
Enter the actual matching pipe nominal wall thickness. Do not subtract out any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion.
This wall thickness is used in the mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus
There is a fair amount of computer logic set up to make intelligent decisions about the configuration that
the user wants insofar as bends, hinges, tied bellows, and pressure thrust are concerned. Users should
review generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with the user’s intentions.
Welded
Standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Slip-on flange.
WN
Weld neck flange.
Plate
Plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure ratings, i.e. over
24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions, codes and materials. When the user
selects a combination not available, he is warned that there is no database values for his particular
geometry and line size.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. Note, however,
that in many instances larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown, in fact in many
small diameter expansion joints the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints. The
CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the bellows in the database, and
checks the maximum pressure in the line (as entered by the user) against the allowed pressure (which as
stated, is often greater than the rated pressure). This particular feature allows the user to select a smaller
joint with more flexibility for certain applications.
Hinged
Single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis. Pressure thrust is
retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable
displacement in a single plane, while transmitting very little load to any attached equipment. The piping
system must, however, be designed to assure that displacement into the hinges is planar for all types of
thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by
the hinge mechanism are high, considerable friction forces can be generated that will somewhat limit
further flexing of the joint, thus transmitting larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes. Gimballed joints restrain
both pressure thrust and torsion via the gimbal mechanism. These joints are often used in pairs to absorb
considerable displacement in several directions, while transmitting very little load to any attached
equipment.
U-UNIV
Untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single unrestrained expansion joint. It
can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a much higher capacity for transverse (lateral)
deflection than a single bellows. An untied universal will subject the system to pressure thrust loads which
must be designed for, external to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible these joints can
often be difficult to use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint
against undesired movement. Additionally, calculations for computing effective bellows axial movements
for arbitrary movements in three dimensions is not trivial.
T-UNIV
Tied universal expansion joint. Similar to a tied single joint, except that the tied universal has much higher
transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust loads are restrained internally via the tie-bars.
These types of joints are a good option where vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The
tie-bars restrict movement to a single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design.
Longer lengths result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight
of the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten times the
pipe diameter. Users should be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but are the most common. If a joint is
needed that is not covered by the above, it is suggested that the user select the style closest to that
required, and then edit the resulting input once the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to the
piping spreadsheet.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G. butt
welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Due to the fact that the specific “media”
content varies from system to system, and that most “media” data specified prior to system operation is
approximate, with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make specific recommendations
concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most common bellows materials that are
supported by CAESAR II:
304SS—A240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SS—A240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600Inc—Inco 600 High Nickel
625Inc—Inco 625 High Nickel
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 87
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces pressure drop and
also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally recommended when the flow
velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely recommended when the flow velocity
exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners
should be used in high velocity or turbulent flow systems. Also heavy liners should be used when the
media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers are used to protect the very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is to be insulated.
Title Page
By pressing <Ctrl>T at any time during pipe spreadsheet input, the current job's title page will be
displayed (also may access through the MODEL - TITLE menu item). This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, etc. These lines
may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
88 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Hanger Data
System-wide hanger design criteria are activated from the input spreadsheet by choosing the Model
Hanger Design Control Data.
Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by entering data into the hanger control spreadsheet
shown above. The Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design spreadsheet. These parameters can be set once in the run control spreadsheet, and
will apply for all individual hangers to be defined unless specifically overridden at the individual hanger
input level. These items are
short-range springs
rigid support displacement criteria
maximum-allowed travel limit
hanger table
multiple load-case design option
In addition, the Hanger Design Control spreadsheet tells the hanger design algorithm the number of
temperature cases to be used in the hanger design, and whether or not the actual cold loads should be
calculated. All of these options will be discussed in detail on the following pages.
Whenever hanger locations are given for the first time, default parameters are assigned for all of the fields
that show up in the Hanger Auxiliary Data field. These default parameters are taken from the Hanger
Design Control spreadsheet. The user should, therefore, enter any non-default parameters that are to apply
globally to all hangers in the Hanger Run Control Spreadsheet.
An individual description of each Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet Data cell follows:
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases
The number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This value may be between 1
and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be used in hanger design. If more than one
Operating case is to be considered in the hanger design then the user must also select the Multiple Load
Case Design option to be used.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 89
This is a parameter used to determine if there is sufficient travel to design a spring. The Rigid Support
Displacement Criteria is a cost saving feature that replaces springs that are not needed with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. From this case the load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined. Once the hanger design load is
known, an operating case is run with the hot hanger load installed to determine the travel at the hanger
location. If this determined hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria then a
rigid Y support is selected for the location instead of a spring.
If the Rigid Support Displacement is left blank or zero, the criteria will not be applied.
The Rigid Support Displacement Criteria may be specified on the Hanger Run Control Spreadsheet, or
on each individual hanger spreadsheet. The value specified on the Run Control Spreadsheet is used as the
default for all hangers not having it defined explicitly.
A typical value to be used is 0.1 in.
Important: In some cases a Single directional restraint should be inserted instead of a rigid rod. Rigid
rods are double acting restraints which can in some cases develop large “hold down” forces that don’t
really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod has bowed slightly. When this
condition develops the user should rerun the hanger design inserting single directional restraints where
rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Hangers should probably never be replaced by rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system that are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit
To specify a limit on the amount of travel a variable support hanger may undergo, specify the limit in this
field. The specification of a maximum travel limit will cause CAESAR II to select a constant effort support
if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the manufacturer
table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
Constant effort hangers can be designed by inputting a very small number for the Maximum Allowed
Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 is typical to force CAESAR II to select a for a particular location.
Hanger Table
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked by further modifying the hanger table number:
Add + 100 to get Extended Range
Add + 200 to get Cold Load Design
Add + 400 to get the Hot load centered if possible.
For example, to use Grinnell Springs and cold load design the user would enter:
1 + 200 = 201.
To use Grinnell “Extended Range” springs, Cold Load Design, and to get the Design Hot load centered in
the middle of the hanger table, if possible, the user would enter:
1 + 100 + 200 + 400 = 701.
92 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
A single job can use any combination of tables. The hanger table can be specified on the individual hanger
spreadsheet, or can be specified on the Hanger Run Control Spreadsheet (see "Hanger Data" on page 88).
If a spring table is entered in the Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet then it is used as the default for all
subsequent hangers defined. The Hanger Design Control Spreadsheet defaults to the hanger table-
specified in the configuration file.
The maximum load range was included in CAESAR II to permit the selection of less expensive variable
support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just outside the
manufacturers recommended range. Users should make sure that the maximum load range is available
from the manufacturer as a standard item.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design. Cold Load Spring Hanger Design is a method of designing the springs,
whereby the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of the piping. This
method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when the stops
are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
In some system configurations, operating loads on connected equipment are lower. A typical
configuration resulting in this “load-reduction” is one where a hot vertical riser, anchored at the
bottom, turns horizontally into a nozzle connection. The spring to be designed is at the elbow adjacent
to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot and cold loads
counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are
In some systems, in the hot condition the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
The decision to use hot or cold load hanger design rests with the user.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design. Many designers prefer that the hot load be centered as close as possible
to the middle of the spring table. This is to provide as much “variability” either way before the spring
bottoms out when the system is hot. This was a much more needed feature, before effective computer
modelling of piping systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or
calculated by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads will be at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II
design algorithm will go to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger
springs range, but will never switch spring types. This option can only result in a one size larger spring
when it is effective. CAESAR II will attempt to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within
10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory then the old one will
be used, even though its hot load is within 10% of the high end of the table load range, to get a springs hot
load close to the middle of the table.
Extended Load Range Springs. Extended load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table.
Some manufacturers build double spring supports to accommodate this range, and others adjust the top or
bottom travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Before using the maximum ranges,
the user should make sure that the manufacturer can properly supply the spring. Use of the extended range
often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support. Lisega springs do not support the "extended
range" idea. A request for extended Lisega springs results in the standard Lisega spring table and ranges.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 93
This field is used to specify the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the
bottom of the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load, added to each temperature case
for “horizontal” pipes.
This entry should be computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees hotter than the
temperature on the bottom. The proper value to enter in this field will be 20, not -20.
Liberal Stress Allowable
A conservative formulation of the allowable expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is
calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When the user requests that the “Liberal Allowable” be used, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided
Sh > Sl, will be added to the term inside the parenthesis, i.e.
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 97
The liberal expression will only be employed when there is at least one sustained stress case in the load
set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the largest of Sl, considering
all of the sustained cases, for any single element end will be chosen to subtract from Sh. Because the
sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the allowable expansion stress will also vary.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file, (see "Liberal
Expansion Stress Allowable" on page 11) in its computation of the expansion stress allowable. (New
models are created using this configuration setting.) Users not wishing to utilize this default setting for
calculating the expansion can simply change the state of this check box.
Uniform Load in G's
Uniform loads can be defined in either terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier times
gravitational loading (g). The loading magnifier can act in any direction and is specified by giving its
components along the three orthogonal X, Y, and Z axes.
Gravitational loading is used most often to model the static equivalent of a dynamic earthquake loading.
When activated, the uniform load fields on the pipe spreadsheet change from UX, UY, and UZ to GX,
GY, and GZ. An entry of: GX = 1.0, GY = 0.0, GZ = 0.0 represents a lg loading on the piping system in
the horizontal X direction. An entry of: GX = 0.0, GY = -1.0, GZ = 0.0 represents a 1.0g load in the minus
Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load.
Gravitational load entries are distributive properties similar to the uniform loads they replace. Once
specified, the given g loading will act on all subsequent pipe elements until changed or zeroed.
The user may activate the gravitational load option at any time during the input of the problem. The
gravitational load option is activated by checking the box.
Note: Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the CAESAR II
recommended load case logic. Users must form their own combination cases at the output processor level
that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to sustained and occasional loads. See Chapter 6 of the
Technical Reference Manual for more on Occasional Load Case definition.
The default ambient temperature for all elements in the system is 70°F/21°C. If this does not accurately
represent the installed, or zero expansion strain state, then enter the actual value in this field. The ambient
temperature is used in conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion
coefficient to calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when
going from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file (see "Ambient Temperature" on
page 4). This (configuration) value is used when a new model is created to set the value of ambient
temperature.
98 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis orientation (i.e.,
Y-values become Z-values) or vice versa, so there is no change in the model only in its representation, as
shown in the following figures:
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not match that
of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need not match
that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (i.e., wind and wave loads), the Static Output
Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated by the orientation
of the model’s input file.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 101
Note: Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, toggling this setting does not
translate the structural input file, but rather physically rotates the model into the new coordinate system, as
shown in the figures below.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the included files need not match
that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When analyzing a structural model on its own, the axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder (i.e.,
wind and wave loads), the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output
Processor is dictated by the orientation of the structural model’s input file.
102 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
File Name. The user may browse for the file name. The file need not reside in the current data directory.
Read Now (Y/N/L)
Y, if the file is to be read immediately and stored as part of the current input (the file read may be edited as
part of the current job). N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking (the file read may not be edited as part of the current job). The L option is discussed under
"Large Job Includes," below.
Rotation. If not zero, then gives the angle about the Y axis by which to rotate the model before including it
in the current job. The rotation applies regardless of the (Y/N) setting.
Note: Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are NOT rotated. Additionally, the rotation of
the model can be accomplished from the LIST Utility.
Node Increment. The increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in the
current job. The node increment applies regardless of the (Y/N) setting.
104 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
List/Edit Facility
The CAESAR II input listings allow the display of all applicable input data in a context display. This mode
is accessed through the Edit - List command. optionally in a user specified format. The user can edit, delete
or modify data in the lists.
The List option screen contains a row of tabs at the bottom that are used to select the various list options
to be displayed. When a tab has been selected the row headings at the top of the spreadsheet will reflect
the specific input data and controlling parameters displayed in the corresponding columns. All of the input
data can be accessed through the various list reports. An example list control screen is shown below.
106 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The reports are generated in column format in a window like that shown above that the user can
interactively review or modify. The cursor can be moved into any field and a new value entered to replace
the original value. The reports may be scrolled vertically or horizontally.
Help may be requested by pressing the <F1> key while in any of the data cells. Cell input may be deleted
by highlighting the selection and pressing the <Delete> key. The list spreadsheet supports standard
windows commands such as Cut and Paste on a field-by-field basis.
The User may edit input data on the list spreadsheet, which will then update the input spreadsheets as well.
Values that carry forward on the input spreadsheet are highlighted in red where there is a change in the
data value. For example, in the sample spreadsheet shown, the diameter changes from 219.075 mm to
508.0 mm on the element from node 90 to 100 so the new diameter is highlighted in red.
Other options from the Element List include the following:
The Find command (invoked with <Ctrl> F or EDIT - FIND menu item) is used to quickly jump to the
element where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number entered, so subsequent
“finds” of the same node can be accomplished by typing <Ctrl> F.
Access to the element Auxiliary Data screens is available by highlighting an element row and choosing
the Aux button from the toolbar or alternatively by right-clicking on an element line and picking the BLOCK
OPERATIONS-AUX item in the popup menu. By single-clicking on any checked items from the window shown
below the appropriate Auxiliary Data field will be displayed. The user may edit the data in the Auxiliary
Data field, which will in turn update the input spreadsheet. Additionally, the user may enter new data by
double-clicking on any of the unchecked boxes to bring up that item's Auxiliary Data screen. An entire
Auxiliary Data field may be deleted by double-clicking on the checked item (a prompt will warn the user
of the impending delete operation).
Block Operations
The list editor has the ability to perform global editing operations on selected parts of the piping system.
These operations include varieties of rotations, duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting.
Block operations are available on the element list only.
Move the cursor to the first element in the group to be operated on and click the row number for that item.
This element should become highlighted. Move the cursor to the last element in the group to be operated
on and click on the corresponding row number while holding the <shift> key down. The entire group of
elements will be highlighted. This “highlighting” defines the elements that any block operations will
change. A block may contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the
model. A block must be defined before CAESAR II will allow the user to enter the BLOCK OPERATIONS menu
item.
After the block has been identified select Block and one of the following sub-menu items to perform the
indicated operation (or right-click in the list processor and select one of the following from the pop-up
menu):
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 107
Rotate
The Rotate dialog box is shown in the following figure. The user may rotate the block through some angle
about the X, Y or Z axis. The Unskew option helps the user take a skewed geometry and return it to an
orthogonal orientation. The Setup option permits the user to determine what in the block should be rotated,
including restraints, displacements, force/moments, uniform loads, and flexible nozzles. The default is for
all of these items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block. Data/message screens illustrating an
example rotation are shown as follows.
Delete
This command deletes the selected block.
Duplicate
The Duplicate dialog is shown in the figure below. The user can make identical copies of the block or can
make mirror image by "flipping" the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes. Mirror imaging is
done on the piping delta dimensions only (i.e. restraints are copied, but not mirror imaged, i.e.: a +Y
restraint will not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.)
108 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The duplicate “setup” option works just like the rotation setup option. Restraints, displacements,
forces/moments, uniform loads and nozzles may individually be included or excluded from the
duplication.
Once the type of duplication is determined the user must decide the following:
Where in the input to put the duplicated group of elements. Either at the end of the current block, the
end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increment to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe elements. Be
sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 109
Nodes
On certain occasions the node numbering in a particular area of the model may not be to the user's liking.
To renumber a part of the model in a more logical fashion use the Block-Node menu command. The two
available options are Increment and Renumber as shown in the following figure.
The user enters the starting node and the increment for the block's nodal renumbering. Every node in the
block on the piping system will be renumbered. The user must be sure that the starting node and increment
will result in unique node numbers for the elements being renumbered. This feature can be used to clean
up part, or all of the piping system. It is not unusual for an analyst to put the entire model in one block and
do a full renumber on all of the nodes. This often presents a much cleaner picture of the analysis to the
client. Users are urged to make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Users should be
particularly careful when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with
Cnodes.
Note: It is common for CAESAR II not to renumber a Cnode in a block having perceived that the Cnode
is connected to a node outside the block. (In fact Cnode will not be renumbered if they do not connect to a
node in the block and on the piping system.)
Any possible confusion can be avoided in these instances by starting the renumbering at a node greater
than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes are renumbered successfully (i.e. there aren't any
dangling Cnodes), then the node Increment command can be issued with a negative increment to shift the
newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
110 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Input Plotting
The following figure shows the CAESAR II graphics interface.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Utility. Commands
may be enabled by clicking toolbar buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot
keys.
Views
The Input Plot may be viewed Isometrically (default), or along any of the three global axes. To view the
plot in the two-dimensional plane normal to a given axis, either press the axis letter on the keyboard (X, Y,
or Z), choose the corresponding Toolbar button, or pick the appropriate menu item under the View menu.
To display the plot in all four views simultaneously, choose the 4 views button, press <ctrl> 4, or select
the 4 views menu item under the View menu. To return to the SE Isometric view, choose the SE ISO View
button, the <F10> function key, or select SOUTHEAST ISO VIEW from the View drop-down menu.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 113
Volume Plotting
The three different volume plots available in CAESAR II are the Volume Plot, the Wire Frame Plot, and
Rendering. Rendering views the model as a 3-D solid, while Volume Plot is the volume outline view.
Toggle Volume on and off with the <V> key, the Volume button on the Toolbar, or the VOLUME PLOT menu
item from the View menu. Toggle 3-D Rendering or 3-D Wire Frame on and off with either the
appropriate button on the Toolbar or the menu choice under the View menu.
Highlight
The Highlight option is used to mark elements having similar properties.
Each subsequent Highlight is cumulative. Very descriptive color displays can be generated and
interactively rotated to give the user a clear description of the conditions used for highlighting.
3D Graphics
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 115
Introduction
The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facilitate model editing
and verification. Model verification can be performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a
combination of both modes is recommended.
When drawing the model, the status bar displays “drawing node X of Y” and changes to “Ready” when
finished. The model remains functional while drawing.
Functions
Hoops Plot Tools (toolbar):
“Reset Plot” Displays the plot in its default configuration: removes any highlighting, sets ISO view, renders
mode, and zooms to extent. This action may also be activated by clicking the “F9” function key
on the keyboard.
“Undo/Redo” Disregards or repeats the user’s last action.
“Zoom to Window” The view can be zoomed in by dragging a box around the desired area.
“Zoom to Extents” The model will zoom in or out to fit entirely on the screen.
Front/Back; Top/Bottom; Allows selecting among predefined generally used views. Pressing “X”, “Y”, or ”Z” buttons on
Left/Right the keyboard will set the model in “right”, “top”, or “front” views correspondingly. Additionally,
holding down the “SHIFT” button while pressing “X”, “Y”, or “Z” keys will show “left”,
“bottom”, or “back” views respectively.
“ISO View” View in Southeast isometric mode. This action may also be activated by clicking the “F10”
function key on the keyboard.
“Orbit” Activates an interactive rotation feature when the left mouse button is held down.
“Zoom” The model may be zoomed in/out by moving mouse up/down while holding down the “left”
mouse button. The model may also be zoomed from under any other command by rotating the
mouse wheel (when applicable).
“Pan” The model may be panned left, right, up, or down. Upon clicking the button, the cursor with
change to a “hand”; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the
“left” mouse button. The view may also be panned from under any other command by holding
down the “middle” mouse button/mouse wheel while moving the mouse.
Freehand Markup: FreeHand, On clicking this button, the drop down menu appears with following options: “Free Hand”,
Circle, Rectangle, Annotate “Circle”, “Rectangle”, and “Annotate”. The geometry or the text entered by this command, are
not kept with the model, and get erased/deleted on any change (like zoom, pan, or rotate).
“Walk through” Allows interactively move “inside” the model, and look left, right, up, and down. A list of
available commands/keys is displayed on the screen.
“Gouraud Shading/ Hidden Will switch the corresponding view mode of the model. Pressing the “V” button on the keyboard
Lines/ Wire Frame/ Two Line will switch the views in following order: Gouraud Shading (rendered mode) -> Two Line Mode -
Mode/ CenterLine View > Center Line View.
“Select by Single Click” Clicking on elements when this option is selected causes the input spreadsheet for the chosen
element to be displayed in the background. The element is highlighted and zoomed to selection.
Additionally, a dialog box with basic element geometry information is updated within the plot
window. The Element Information screen may be moved around or away from the view. Clicking
on the empty space will de-highlight the element.
“Insert Cutting Plane” Inserts cutting plane
Annotate Model When the button is selected the user can add annotations with leader lines to the graphics. This is
done by left-clicking the mouse to start the leader line, then dragging the line to the annotation
point, typing in the annotation, and then pressing the Enter button. NOTE: The annotation font
face, size, and color may be changed by clicking “Change Display Options” button.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 117
Note: Most of the operations are also available by right-clicking the mouse and selecting an action from
the popup menu. Pressing [ESC] or re-selecting from the popup menu exits the action.
4 Views Allows viewing all four view modes simultaneously (“right”, “top”, “front”, and “ISO”). Upon
clicking the button, the splitter bars appear, move the mouse to the desired position, and click the left
mouse button. NOTE: all the four views can be operated on independently (zoom, pan, or orbit);
however, the “model-level” operations (like selection, coloring for restraints or diameters, node
numbers, etc.) update all four views simultaneously.
Expansion Joints/ Tees/ Displays and highlights with color the expansion joints, tees, or flexible nozzles correspondingly.
Nozzles
Anchors/ Hangers/ Displays anchors (alternatively, Menu PlotOptions -> Anchors or “F2” function key), hangers
Restraints (alternatively, Menu PlotOptions -> Hangers or “F4” function key), and non-anchor, non-hanger
restraints (alternatively, Menu PlotOptions -> Restraints or “F7” function button) correspondingly.
Note: the size of mentioned boundary condition symbols corresponds to the pipe sizing (OD). In
addition, size of restraints and hangers may be manually adjusted to become larger or smaller by
clicking on the black arrow to the right of the button and selecting the size option from the drop down
menu
Materials/ Diameters/ Wall Displays a list of distinct construction materials (keyboard letter “M”), pipe outside diameters
Thickness/ Insulation (keyboard letter “D”), wall thicknesses (keyboard letter “W”), and/or insulation thicknesses
(keyboard letter “I”) used in the model, and colors the corresponding elements on the view with
separate colors.
Displacements/ Forces/ Predefined displacements, Forces and Moments, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave loads may be
Uniform Loads/ Winds- graphically colored on the model. The corresponding legend window is filled with relevant
Waves information. The legend window may be dragged away from the viewing area. When printed, the
legend in the form of grid is printed on the second page, following the graphics view.
View Compass Toggles the display of the coordinate system compass. In addition, the “compass” symbol may be
toggled on the screen by typing the letter “P” on the keyboard.
Node Numbers Labels plot with node numbers. Note: the font face, size and color of the node numbers may be
changed by clicking “Change Display Options” button. In addition, the node numbers may be toggled
on the screen by typing the letter “N” on the keyboard.
Lengths Labels plot with element lengths. Note: the font face, size and color of the node numbers may be
changed by clicking “Change Display Options” button. In addition, the element lengths may be
toggled on the screen by typing the letter “L” on the keyboard.
Range Displays elements based on node ranges. The dialog allows select all/clear all node numbers, reverse
selection, or enter “from” and “to” nodes. Typing “U” from the keyboard will bring the range dialog
out.
View Input Spreadsheet The “View Spreadsheet” command allows the user to maintain both the plot and the spreadsheet on
the screen simultaneously. If “Select by Single Click” button is pressed, the switching among
elements in the spreadsheet view will highlight and zoom to the current element on the graphics
view.
118 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Show Temperatures/ Displays each element temperature or pressure (respectively) as a separate color. If
Pressures temperature/pressure 2-9 are used, a menu appears allowing the user to choose which
temperature/pressure range to display. The legend is displayed in a separate window, that may be
dragged away from the view.
Find Node When pressed, it will display a “find node” dialog box. Entering node numbers will select/highlight
the element (if found) and move it into the window (zoom to selection)
Note: The current plot may be output to the clipboard, a bitmap file (.TIF), or a printer through use of the
Edit-Copy, File-Save As Bitmap, or File-Print commands, respectively.
Chapter 3 Piping Screen Reference 119
Introduction
The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the analytic results in
graphics mode, which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
Functions
The output graphics contains the same 2 toolbars as were used in the input graphics: Hoops Standard
Toolbar – with zoom, pan, orbit and related buttons, and Hoops Input Toolbar – with buttons for restraints,
materials, diameters, node numbers and other related buttons. See the description of the buttons in the
“Piping Input Graphics” section.
Load Cases Analysed This is a drop down list box with a choice of the loads cases that were analyzed for the job. You
can switch among available load cases to see the corresponding output.
Deflected Shape The plot will show the model view along with a normalized/scaled deflected shape of the system
in the operating condition for the currently selected load case. The deflection scale can be
adjusted by clicking the small black arrow on the right of the button and selecting “Adjust
Deflection Scale” option form the menu. The color of the displaced geometry can be changed by
clicking the “Change Display Options” button on the “Hoops Standard Toolbar”, and then
proceeding to the “Output Options” tab.
Grow Not active
Maximum Displacements - X/ Allows the user to put the actual magnitude for X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently
Y/ Z displayed geometry. It starts with highest value for given direction, then (on pressing “Enter”)
puts 2nd, 3rd highest, etc. Subsequent click of the same button will turn this option off and refresh
the plot. Each corresponding element is highlighted on the view. If “Zoom to Selection” button is
clicked on the toolbar, the view will be zoomed to the highlighted element. If the “Show Element
Viewer Grid” button is clicked on the toolbar, the “Event Viewer” dialog will be displayed: it
contains all the nodes in the model, report is set to Displacements for particular load case, and the
corresponding displacements column (DX, DY, or DZ) is highlighted.
Maximum Restraint Loads – Allows the user to put the magnitude for forces and moments in selected direction for the
FX/ FY/ FZ/ MX/ MY/ MZ restrained nodes. It starts with highest for given option/direction, then (on pressing “Enter”) puts
2nd, 3rd highest, etc. Subsequent click of the same button will turn this option off and refresh the
plot. Each corresponding element is highlighted on the view. If “Zoom to Selection” button is
clicked on the toolbar, the view will be zoomed to the highlighted element. If the “Show Element
Viewer Grid” button is clicked on the toolbar, the “Event Viewer” dialog will be displayed: it
contains all the nodes in the model, report is set to Restraints for particular load case, and the
corresponding Force/Moment column is highlighted.
Overstress Displays with color overstressed points on the elements. Overstressed conditions are only
detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable
stresses available). This operation is similar to “Show Code Stress by Percent”; but only points
with code stress to allowable ratio of greater than 100% are displayed.
120 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Maximum Code Stress Displays code stresses one at a time from the largest to the smallest values. Subsequent click of
the same button will turn this option off and refresh the plot. Each corresponding element is
highlighted on the view. If “Zoom to Selection” button is clicked on the toolbar, the view will be
zoomed to the highlighted element. If the “Show Element Viewer Grid” button is clicked on the
toolbar, the “Event Viewer” dialog will be displayed: it contains all the nodes in the model, report
is set to Stresses for particular load case, and the “Code Stress” column is highlighted.
Show Code Stress Colors by Plots the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to the value or percent of
Value / Show Code Stress allowable (respectively) of the code stress. The Legend window can be resized and/or moved
Colors by Percent away from the view. Colors and corresponding stress levels are initially set in the
Configuration/Setup module. They can also be adjusted by clicking the small black arrow on the
right of the button and selecting “Adjust Settings” option form the menu.
Show Element Viewer Grid If “Show Element Viewer Grid” button is clicked on the toolbar, the “Event Viewer” dialog will
be displayed whenever any of the Displacements, Restraint Loads, or Stresses buttons is used.
The “Event Viewer Grid” contains a selection of load cases analyzed, a set of reports to choose
from, all the nodes in the model and other useful information in tabular form. Upon selecting any
of the “output options” buttons, the “Event Viewer” will be pre-set to the corresponding load case
and report. The summary of the reports for any particular element may also be obtained by
clicking “Select by Single Click” button on the Hoops Standard Toolbar and pointing to an
element on the view.
Zoom to Selection If “Zoom to Selection” button is clicked on the toolbar, the view will be zoomed to the
highlighted element whenever any of the Displacements, Restraint Loads, or Stress buttons is
used. If the button is not “ON”, the elements will still be highlighted, but view will not be zoomed
to the selection.
Notes: on operating “Output Options” buttons (max. displacements, restraint loads, and stresses):
(1) Each corresponding element is highlighted on the view.
(2) If “Zoom to Selection” button is clicked on the toolbar, the view will be zoomed to the highlighted
element.
(3) If the “Show Element Viewer Grid” button is clicked on the toolbar, the “Event Viewer” dialog will be
displayed. It will be pre-set to the corresponding load case and report; column with relevant information
and row with selected element will be highlighted on the grid.
1
CHAPTER 4
In This Chapter
Overview .....................................................................................2
The Structural Steel Property Editor ...........................................3
General Properties.......................................................................12
UNITS Specification - UNIT ......................................................13
Axis Orientation Vertical ............................................................14
Section Identification - SECID....................................................16
Setting Defaults - DEFAULT......................................................19
Setting Nodes in Space - NODE, NFILL, NGEN .......................20
Building Elements - ELEM, EFILL, EGEN, EDIM....................24
Resetting Element Strong Axis - ANGLE, ORIENT ..................32
End Connection Information .......................................................35
Loads...........................................................................................46
Utilities........................................................................................52
Material Identification - MATID.................................................53
Data Processing - STAT..............................................................55
Structural Databases....................................................................56
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Overview
The following pages contain descriptions of each of the structural element keywords. These definitions
and examples arranged in usage order. The following list of all the keywords is arranged alphabetically
and gives the page number for each keyword where its input description can be found.
Keyword/Page Number
ANGLE (on page 32)
BEAMS (see "ANGLE" on page 32)
BRACES (on page 40)
COLUMNS
DEFAULT
EDIM
EFILL
EGEN
ELEM
FIX
FREE
GLOAD
LIST
LOAD
MATID
NFILL
NGEN
NODE
ORIENT
PLOT
SECID
STAT
UNIF
UNIT
WIND
VERTICAL
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 3
New File
From the CAESAR II Main Menu, select FILE/NEW to begin the process. Type the name of the structural steel
file you want to create. To begin this process, click the Structural Input radio button and click OK to
launch the Structural Steel Wizard.
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Units File
Select the units file that the structural file will be based on from the pull-down list on this screen. To
continue, click Next.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 5
Vertical Axis
Select either the Y or Z axis as the vertical axis aligned with gravity from the pull-down list on this screen.
To continue, click Next.
6 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Material Properties
Enter the material properties for the structural steel members here before continuing. These include
Density, Young's Modulus, Yield Strength, Poisson's Ration, and Thermal Expansion Coefficients. The
latter corresponds to operating temperatures 1 through 9 if used. You may have multiple materials using a
unique Material ID for each. For additional materials you must complete the wizard first, then continue in
the Structural Steel Modeler as instructed later in this chapter. To continue, click Next.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 7
Enter the appropriate cross sectional type (note these must be entered exactly as listed at the end of this
chapter). An easier method is to click the Select Section ID button and then expand the appropriate tree
(beams, channels, tees, or angles) as shown below. All of the cross section types supported by CAESAR II
are then available for selection.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 9
If the section type is to be user-defined, check the User Defined box and enter the data in the area to the
right as shown below.
Enter the Cross Sectional Area, Strong and Weak axis moments of inertia, the torsional resistivity
constant, and the height and width of the rectangle for plotting purposes.
Note: In the plot of a User Defined Cross Section, the section will appear as a simple rectangle with
dimensions in BoxH and BoxW.
To continue, click Next.
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Select either Type 1 (element Definition using the EDIM commands) or Type 2 (Node and Element
Definition using the NODE and ELEM commands). Click Finish to complete the wizard and the main
Structural Steel Modeler window appears populated with data from the wizard.
Once this portion of the model is complete you can make further entries as detailed in the following
section.
12 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
General Properties
All directives are picked from either the menu or the toolbar. After the information is filled out in the input
fields on the left side of the window, press the +-sign button to add the command to the model (or drag the
dialog to the appropriate position in the text). The appropriate text will appear on the right side of the
window (the white section). The following graphics show how to choose the commands, the input fields,
and the resultant input file text (always the last line of text on the right). There is no provision to type in
commands directly in the text section.
Add
Click on the + button to add the data in the edit dialog to the end of the model.
Insert
Highlight a given command line in the input list section and click the Insert button to insert the data in the
edit dialog in front of the highlighted command.
Replace
Click the Replace button to replace the currently highlighted command line with the data in the edit
dialog.
Delete
Click the Delete button to remove the highlighted command line from the model.
Note: The data in the Edit dialog may also be dragged to its appropriate position in the model text area.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 13
Units Specification
Used to specify the UNITS file to be used, instead of the UNITS file currently designed in the
configuration file. This command should appear first, before any Material, Section, or Dimensional data is
entered.
14 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Vertical by changing the value of the Vertical command, activated by clicking the button on the
toolbar, or through the COMMANDS/MISCELLANEOUS/VERTICAL menu command, as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 15
Note: Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, toggling this setting does not
translate the structural input file, but rather physically rotates the model into the new coordinate system.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the included files need not match
that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When analyzing a structural model on its own, the axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder (i.e.,
wind, and wave loads), the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Processor is dictated by the
orientation of the structural model’s input.
16 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Section Definition
Section ID
Used to assign member cross section properties to Section ID numbers.
SECID secid, NAME = <label>
SECID
A user defined Section ID to be used for all future referencing of this set of cross section properties.
(Usually Section ID’s start from 1 and go up, but the user may assign values in any order that is
convenient.)
Name
Either an AISC shape name or the word “USER.” All AISC names should be keyed exactly as shown in
the AISC handbook with the exception that fractions should be represented as decimals., i.e. the angle:
LX6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered: L6X3.5X0.5. Leading or trailing zeros may be omitted. Alternatively,
the user may select the appropriate section name from the window provided when the user clicks on the
Select Section ID button. A full list of available Section types are found at the end of this chapter.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 17
User-Defined
For a user-defined shape click on the check box labeled User Defined. There are six additional parameters
that must be entered to fully define the user’s cross section:
Area
Cross section area (length2).
Ixx
Strong axis moment of inertia (length4).
Iyy
Weak axis moment of inertia (length4).
Torsional R
Torsional resistivity constant (length4).
BOXH
Height of a rectangular box for plotting (height is along the weak axis).
18 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
BOXW
Width of a rectangular box for plotting (width is along the strong axis).
Used to set the default values of the Section ID and the Material ID. Whenever an element generation
occurs and the Section and/or the Material ID is omitted, the default values set here are used. The initial
default value for both the Section and the Material ID is 1.
20 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Node Definition
Used to define the absolute coordinates of a point in global X, Y, Z space.
NODE num X, Y, Z
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 21
NFILL
NGEN
n1
First node in the base node pattern (must exist before the NGEN command is issued).
TO
Last node in the base node pattern (must exist before the NGEN command is issued).
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 23
BY
Increment to get from the starting node to the ending node in the base pattern. n1, TO and BY define the
nodes in the base pattern. All subsequent nodal patterns generated start from the base pattern. If omitted
the default is 1.
LAST
Last node in the last nodal pattern to be generated. If omitted then a single pattern duplication will occur.
NODEINC
Increment to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in the first generated pattern, and then
from this pattern to the next generated pattern, etc.
DX, DY, DZ
Coordinates offset to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in the first generated pattern, and
then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, etc.
Example
In the preceding figure, the nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice, each
new pattern offset 10 ft. in the z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000. Note that the NFILL command previous to this NGEN command was not necessary.
24 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
EFILL
EFILL n1, TO, INC, INCTO, LAST, SECID, MATID, INCSECID, INCMAT
D
n1
“FROM” node number on the first element generated.
TO
“TO” node number on the first element generated.
26 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element to the “FROM” node on the second element.
If omitted, INC defaults to 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
LAST
“TO” node on the last element to be generated.
SECID
Section ID for the first element generated.
MATID
Material ID for the first element generated.
INCSECID
Increment to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID for the second element.
(Default=0)
INCMATID
Increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the second element.
(Default=0)
Example
In the preceding figure elements were generated between each pair of nodes between node 1200 and 2000.
The increment between From to From nodes and To to To nodes is the same in this case, being equal to
100. Eight elements were created in this example, together with the one element previously created using
the ELEM command for a total of nine elements. Note that the ELEM command would not have been
necessary here, since all nine elements could have been created using the EFILL command by simply
substituting node 1100 in place of node 1200 in the From Node field.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 27
EGEN
Duplicating Elements
Used to duplicate patterns of elements. EGEN is a very flexible and very powerful generation command
that should be used carefully. The form of EGEN shown below does not presume that any of the elements
in the base pattern exist before the generation. If elements in the base pattern do exist before the
generation they will be redefined during the generation process.
n1
“FROM” node on the first element in the base pattern.
TO
“TO” node on the first element in the base pattern.
28 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element in the base pattern to the “FROM” node on
the second element in base pattern. If omitted defaults to 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
LAST
“TO” node on the last element in the base pattern. The EGEN command is set up to generate multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
GENINC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element in the base pattern to the “FROM” node on
the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
GENINCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element in the base pattern to the “TO” node on the first
element in the first duplicate pattern. If omitted defaults to GENINC.
GENLAST
The “TO” node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base pattern.
SECID
Section ID to be used for the elements in the base pattern. If omitted the default Section ID is used. See
the “help” for DEFAULT for an explanation of how the default Section ID is set up. On start-up the
default Section ID is 1.
MATID
Material ID to be used for the elements in the base pattern. If omitted the default Material ID is used. See
“help” for DEFAULT for an explanation of how the default material ID is set up. On start-up the default
material ID is 1.
INCSECID
Section ID increment to be used between patterns. i.e. the first pattern of elements generated from the base
pattern of elements will have a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID. If omitted defaults to zero.
INCMATID
Material ID increment to be used between patterns. If omitted defaults to zero.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 29
Example
In the preceding figure the base element pattern from 1100 to 2000 was reproduced two more times, from
2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000. Each element has nodal increments of 100. The increment between
the base element list and the next element list is 1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. Then the
cross members were created using the base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal
increments of 100 until node 4000 was reached. The following figure shows the resultant model.
EDIM
Define elements using the dimensions of the element rather than references to nodes. Any existing
elements encountered will be redefined.
The EDIM element definition is probably more familiar to piping engineers while ELEM, EGEN, and
EFIL are more familiar to structural engineers. INC, INCTO, and LAST may be omitted to define a single
element.
INC
Increment to get from the "FROM" node on the first element to the "FROM" node on the second element.
If omitted, the default is 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the "TO" node on the first element to the "TO" node on the second element. If
omitted, the default is INC.
LAST
"TO" node on the last element to be defined.
DX, DY, DZ
Dimensions of the member between the "FROM" and the "TO" node. These dimensions apply for each
member in this pattern being generated. (i.e. EDIM generates elements that are exactly the same length
and orientation).
SECID
Section ID for the first element. If not given, then the current default is used. (See Help for keyword
DEFAULT (see "Setting Defaults - DEFAULT" on page 19).)
MATID
Material ID for the first element. If not given, then the current default is used. (See Help for keyword
DEFAULT.)
INSECID
Section ID increment to get from the Section ID of the first element to the Section ID of the second
element.
INCMATID
Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the Material ID of the second
element.
DX, DY, DZ
Coordinates offset to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in the first generated pattern, and
then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, etc.
Examples
EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2..Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10
EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2....................Same column
EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3.....Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, and 7-
8. INC defaults to 1.
Enter the 4 EDIM commands top define the small frame shown to the right.
Remember that every thing after a (:) or (:) on the line is treated as a
comment.
ANGLE n1
n1
Default strong axis orientation angle to be used for all subsequently defined elements.
ORIENT
Used to define the element strong axis orientation. Note that values for n1 and “TO” may be given as
node numbers or element indices. Element indices are enclosed in parentheses. An example of the index
input is given at the bottom.
n1
“FROM” node on the first element.
TO
“TO” node on the first element.
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element to the “FROM” node on the second element.
If omitted, INC defaults to 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
n1
“FROM” node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
LAST
“TO” node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
ANGLE
Rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member strong axis.
Examples
ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90 The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 degrees away from the
default position.
ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90 The elements: 5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 all
have their strong axis 90 degrees away from the default position. If each of these members is a vertical
column, then their new strong axis of bending is along the Z axis. (This means that the columns with their
new orientation are better suited to take X direction forces.)
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 35
n1
“FROM” node on the first element that this FREE spec is to apply to.
TO
“TO” node on the first element that this FREE spec is to apply to.
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element to the “FROM” node on the second element.
If omitted, INC defaults to 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 37
LAST
“TO” node on the last element this FREE spec is to apply to. LAST, INC, and INCTO can be omitted if
the FREE spec is only to apply to a single element.
<free end parms> - May be any single combination of:
Enter those <free end parms> that define the degrees of freedom at the element end that should be
“FREE.”
In the case where a small WF shape attaches to a large I beam the connection might be designed so that
weak axis bending of the WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I beam. If the element defining the
WF shape went from nodes 1040 to 1045 then the “FREE” spec for this element might appear:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 FBNDWEAK, TBNDWEAK
The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached rigidly to
columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes: 610-710, 620-720, 630-730,
...,690-790. There are eight beams in all in this group. The 600 end is the end that is pinned. The FREE
spec for this group might appear:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 FTORS, FBNDSTR, FBNDWEAK
38 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Auxiliary Data Area for Defining Default End Connections for BEAMS
Defines default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center line. The
definition of BEAM is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. Once the BEAMS keyword is used to define element end connection freedoms any element
subsequently defined that fits the above definition for a beam will have those same end connection
freedoms. This will continue until the BEAMS keyword is reset or re-specified. The default condition is
for each end of any member to be fixed in all six degrees of freedom to its nodes.
BEAMS has two possible setting modes: FIX and FREE. The FREE mode is to set “FREE” end
connection defaults, and the FIX mode is to reset the end connection types once all beams with that
particular “FREE” end connection have been defined.
BEAMS FREE <free end parms>...use to release end connections.
BEAMS FIX <free end parms>...use to reset released-end connections
The <free end parms> are discussed in greater detail with the “FREE” keyword. The <free end parms>
defining the 12 local degrees of freedom for each element are:
FAXIAL TAXIAL
FSHRSTR TSHRSTR
FSHRWEAK TSHRWEAK
FTORS TTORS
FBNDSTR TBNDSTR
FBNDWEAK TBNDWEAK
Example
Just before defining a group of beams that had both ends pinned, the following “BEAMS” command
would be issued:
BEAMSFREE FTORS, FBNDSTR, FBNDWEAK, TBNDSTR, TBNDWEAK,
Just after defining the pinned end beams, to return the end connection defaults to their regular values the
following “BEAMS” command would be issued:
BEAMSFIX FTORS, FBNDSTR, FBNDWEAK, TBNDSTR, TBNDWEAK,
As shorthand notation, if the word “FIX” is all that appears on the line following “BEAMS,” then all end
connections for the beam will be fixed, i.e.
BEAMS FIX
40 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
BRACES
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 41
Just after defining the pinned end braces, to return the end connection defaults to their regular values the
following “BRACES” command would be issued.
BRACESFIX FTORS, FBNDSTR, FBNDWEAK, TBNDSTR, TBNDWEAK,
As shorthand notation, if the word “FIX” is all that appears on the line following “BRACES,” then all end
connections for the brace will be fixed, i.e.
BRACES FIX
42 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
COLUMNS
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 43
Just after defining the pinned end columns, to return the end connection defaults to their regular values the
following “COLUMNS” command would be issued:
COLUMNSSFREE TTORS, TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK, TBNDSTR, TBNDWEAK,
,
As shorthand notation, if the word “FIX” is all that appears on the line following “COLUMNS”, then all
end connections for the column will be fixed, i.e.
COLUMNS FIX
Note: As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element can not
have both TTORS and FTORS released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.
44 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
FIX n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, n8, n9,
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 45
Examples
FIX 1
ALL - Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000 Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs
FIX 100 TO 110 ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The increment
between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes: 105, 110,
115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
46 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Loads
Point Loads - LOAD
Used to define concentrated forces and/or moments that act at structural member end points. “TO” and
“BY” may be omitted to define loads for a single point. LOAD may be abbreviated: LOA. Note that
values for n1 and “TO” may be given as node numbers or indices. Node indices are enclosed in
parentheses.
LOAD n1, TO, BY, FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY,
Examples
LOAD 305 FY-1000 Have minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node #305.
LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707,FZ=707 Have skewed load in the horizontal plane acting at each of the
nodes 10,11,...,17,18. “BY” could have been omitted here, its default is 1.
LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383 A load of 383 pounds acts in the minus Y direction on the 15’th through the
25’th nodes in the node list.
n1
“FROM” node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
TO
“TO” node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element to the “FROM” node on the second element.
If omitted, INC defaults to 1.
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
LAST
“TO” node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
UX,UY,UZ
Magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y and Z directions. Unless used in a piping analysis
employing “g” loads, uniform loads are in units of force per unit length of member. When used in a
piping analysis with “g” loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational acceleration., i.e. UY=-1
would define a uniform load identical to the member weight load.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 49
Examples
UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3 lbs. per inch
acts in the minus Y direction.
UNIF 1,2, UY -2,3 Same
UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1,0.03 Uniform load acting on elements 100-200, 102-203,...,300-500 with a small
horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. (Looks like have “g” load input for piping problem.)
UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first 30 elements in the element list have a uniform load of -2.3 pounds per
inch acting in the minus Y direction.
n1
“FROM” node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
TO
“TO” node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
INC
Increment to get from the “FROM” node on the first element to the “FROM” node on the second element.
If omitted, INC defaults to 1.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 51
INCTO
Increment to get from the “TO” node on the first element to the “TO” node on the second element. If
INCTO is not given, it defaults to INC.
LAST
“TO” node on the last element the wind load is to act on.
SHAPE
Magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this value is usually 2.0. Wind loading
on the structure can be turned on and off by resetting this parameter to zero, for elements not exposed to
the wind.
This value carries forward to all subsequently defined elements.
Examples
WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0 On the element from 1 to 2 a shape factor with a magnitude of 2.0 is applied.
This value is applied to all following elements.
WIND 1,2,SHAPE 2.0 Same
WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 Wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.
52 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Utilities
LIST
To access the List option, click the List Tab located at the bottom of the Structural Steel Modeler. List
enables users to display node and coordinate data; enter node ranges; and also select input list reports.
Note, selecting all displays a of each report in the order they appear on the modeler window.
Used to enter material properties that correspond to a Material ID number.There must be at least one valid
material spec given per job. One Material ID can be used for a group of elements that have many Section
ID’s. (In fact there is usually only a single Material ID specified for any one job.) Units from the specified
UNITS.FIL are used. Default material properties (i.e. for A-36 structural steel) may be invoked by issuing
the following MATID command: MATID 1.
MATID
User defined material ID number. (Usually 1, and sequentially thereafter)
54 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
YM
Young’s Modulus of Elasticity
POIS
Poisson’s Ratio (Usually 0.3)
G
Shear Modulus of Elasticity (Usually about one third of YM)
YS
Yield Strength (Currently not used)
DENS
Material Density
ALPHA
Material coefficient of thermal expansion
There can be up to three thermal cases (corresponding to thermal cases T1, T2, and T3) defined for
structural steel members. Thermal effects on structural members are entered using thermal expansion
coefficients in terms of in./in, mm./mm., i.e. unitless. The three thermal coefficients are entered after the
density. One, two, or three thermal coefficients may be entered.
Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler 55
Model Status
56 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each cross section. For the
finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II. The databases are those of the AISC
1977, the AISC 1989, the German 1991, the Australian 1990, the South African 1992, Korean 1990, and
UK 1993. The member designations for each database are listed as follows:
B8X6X1.0000 B8X6X0.7500
T120 T140
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
UK 1993 Database
Korean 1990 Database
W594X302 W588X300 W582X300 W612X202 W606X201
W600X200 W596X199 W488X300 W482X300 W506X201
W500X200 W496X199 W440X300 W434X299 W450X200
W446X199 W390X300 W386X299 W404X201 W400X200
W396X199 W350X350 W344X354 W344X348 W340X250
W336X249 W354X176 W350X175 W346X174 W310X310
W310X305 W304X301 W300X305 W300X300 W298X299
W294X302 W298X201 W294X200 W300X150 W298X149
W250X255 W250X250 W248X249 W244X252 W244X175
W250X125 W248X124 W208X202 W200X204 W200X200
W194X150 W200X100 W150X150 W148X100 W150X75
W125X125 W100X100
CHAPTER 5
In This Chapter
Dynamic Analysis Input ..............................................................2
Dynamic Analysis Overview .......................................................3
Harmonic Analysis ......................................................................8
Response Spectra / Time History Load Profiles..........................15
Building Spectrum / Time History Load Cases ...........................21
Spectrum Time History ...............................................................32
Lumped Masses...........................................................................37
Dynamic Control Parameters.......................................................40
Advanced Parameters ..................................................................71
Pulsation Loads ...........................................................................75
Relief Valve Thrust Load Analysis .............................................77
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The analysis type is selected from the drop list on the upper left portion of the window and the tabbed
items will be modified depending on the type of analysis to be performed. If the model contains spring
hangers to be designed, or single directional supports, gaps, rods, or friction, then a static analysis must be
performed before the dynamic analysis to determine how the nonlinear supports are acting. The following
sections describe the specific input for each of the options available from the Dynamics Input Menu.
See Chapter 8 of the User Guide for a thorough discussion of basic dynamic load cases and data, and for a
description of “how to” interact with the dynamics input processor.
The current units applicable to the dynamics input are pulled from the piping input file (or from the
Configuration file in the event of a structural-only job).
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 3
Random
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude unpredictably with time, although
there may be predominant characteristics within the load profile. Loads with random force/time profiles
are best solved using the Spectrum method. Major types of loads with random time profiles are
Wind—Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe,
creating an “equivalent pressure” on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they may have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, i.e., sudden
changes in direction and velocity. As the observed time period lengthens, the observed number of
changes increases in an unpredictable manner as well, eventually encompassing nearly all directions
and a wide range of velocities.
Earthquake—Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random motion
(accelerations, velocities, and displacements) of the ground and corresponding inertia loads (the mass
of the system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage. The
random ground motion is actually the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic)
ground motions. Two earthquakes may be similar in terms of predominant direction (along a fault, for
example), predominant harmonic frequencies (if certain of the underlying cyclic motions tend to
dominate), and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time may be quite
different and unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic profile,
ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load may be
described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + Q)
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
Q = phase shift between the pressure peaks at a and b
= ts
Combining these equations, the equation for the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair can be
written as:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation would exist at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
6 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains relatively
constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this type of profile
resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved using the Time History or
Force Spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
Relief valve—When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to
vent fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system; this force ramps up to its full value, from zero, over the opening time of the valve. The
relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid is vented
to relief the over-pressure situation. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet force over the
closing time of the valve.
Fluid hammer—When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted at one point, through
valve closure or a pump trip, the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped
instantaneously as well. As fluid continues to flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or
pump), the fluid compresses, causing a high pressure situation at that point. Likewise, on the other
side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the stoppage point, creating a low pressure
(vacuum) situation at that location. Fluid at the next elbow or closure along the pipeline is still at the
original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure force acting on the valve seat or the
elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of flow
stoppage, thus causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the pulse moves
past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run, leading to a balanced (i.e.,
zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. However the unbalanced pressure, by passing the elbow, has now
shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure load will continue to rise and fall in sequential legs as
the pressure pulse travels back to the source (or forward to the sink).
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow, such
as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Since the leading edge of the pressure pulse is not
expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the ramp down time is the same. The duration
of the load from initiation through the beginning of the down ramp is equal to the time required for the
pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe leg.
Slug flow—Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (i.e., those which are
uniformly liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, however, the fluid may have multiple phases.
For example, slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids, and gases may condense, creating
pockets of liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to
slug flow.
In general, when fluid changes direction in a piping system, this is done through the application of forces
at elbows. This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
= fluid density
v = fluid velocity
A = internal area of pipe
= inclusion angle at elbow
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 7
Normally this force is constant, and is small enough that it can be easily absorbed through tension in the
pipe wall, to be passed on to adjacent elbows which may have equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net
load on the system. Therefore these type of momentum loads are usually ignored by the stress analyst.
However, if the fluid velocity or density changes with time, this momentum load will change with time as
well, leading to a dynamic (changing) load, which may not be cancelled by the load at other elbows.
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is insignificant,
since the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. Suddenly the liquid slug hits the elbow, increasing the
momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long as it takes for the slug to traverse the
elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again, with the exact profile of the slug load depending upon
the shape of the slug. The time duration of the load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the
velocity of the fluid.
8 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Input Excitation Frequencies
Starting Frequency
First frequency in the user’s defined excitation frequency range. The defined harmonic displacements and
forces will have the form: A*cosine(wt+p), where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, p is the
phase angle, and is the frequency of the loading. Real and imaginary solutions will be developed for
each frequency in the defined range (from which any phased solution can be calculated). For an entered
frequency range to be valid there must be at least a starting frequency. All frequencies are entered in
Hertz.
Ending Frequency
Last frequency in the user’s defined excitation frequency range. If omitted then it defaults to the Starting
frequency.
Increment
Frequency increment. If omitted then defaults to 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each frequency range defined by the user.
Individual frequencies for excitation are computed using a “DO LOOP” type of logic as follows:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 9
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load was applied at 3 Hertz was almost zero. This
was true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load (i.e. the maximum conceivable varying pressure
load was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hertz). Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and see if any
dynamic response can be observed.
GROUP OF FREQUENCIES AROUND THE FIELD “GUESSED AT”
3 HERTZ EXCITATION. THE EXCITATION FREQUENCIES
DEFINED BY THE INPUT BELOW ARE:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) HZ.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Number of cycles expected for this loading. If entered, this signals to CAESAR II that the harmonic load
case should be treated as a fatigue stress case with the allowable stress based on this/the number of
anticipated cycles.
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Harmonic Forces
Harmonic Forces
Either the Harmonic Forces or the Displacements must be entered in addition to the Excitation Frequency
Data. Click the Harmonic Forces button to bring up a window like that shown below. Click the + button
on the toolbar to add a harmonic force.
Force
Amplitude of the harmonic force. The form of the harmonic forcing function is: F(t) = A*cosine( t- ),
where “F(t)” is the force as a function of time. “A” is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic force. “ ”
is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and “p” is the phase angle (in radians). Enter the
force in the units shown. These units are taken from the current set which resides on the file UNITS.FIL.
Direction
Enter the line of action of the force as either X, Y, Z, or as direction cosines or direction vectors. The
format for direction cosines is (cx,cy,cz), i.e (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy,
vz), i.e. (1,0,1).
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 11
Phase
Enter the phase angle in degrees. The harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to
zero, or the harmonic load can start with its maximum at any time between zero and t=2*pi/w seconds.
The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase
angle can be calculated from the time shift using the equation: p(degrees) = 180tw/pi, where t is given in
seconds and w is given in radians per second. Most frequently the phase angle is entered as either zero or
90. The phase specification is most useful when defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment. Some of
the examples that follow discuss common applications of the phase angle input. The phase angle is a
required input. If the phase angle is zero, then 0.0 must be entered !
Start Node
The node where the force is to act. This entry is required. If entered without a Stop Node and Increment,
then this node must exist in the piping system. If entered with a Stop Node and Increment, then the range
of nodes identified by the loop must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Used as a part of a “range of nodes” force loading command. This entry is optional.
Increment
Used as a part of a “range of nodes” force loading command. This entry is optional.
EXAMPLES
It is assumed that a pressure pulse traveling in the line between nodes 95 and 100 causes the line to shake
at about 2 hertz. The magnitude of the pressure loading (See the examples for calculating forces from
pressures) is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to 100. The harmonic force
to model this load is shown as follows. Note that the magnitude is divided by 2 because the total variation
in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1 to 1. To find the true response
magnitudes from a positive only harmonic load pulse, a static solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the plus X
direction would have to be superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution to provide the constant shifting of
the load axis (i.e. as defined in the following example, there will exist a negative load at node 95 due to
the negative sign on the cosine). The pressure pulse will always be positive and so a negative load will
never exist. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution makes sure that the dynamic load (and probably
the resulting displacements) are always positive.
460 LB PRESSURE LOAD AT 2 HERTZ 460/2 X 0.0 95
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of the
dynamic load is computed to be 750 lb. from the manufacturers provided masses and eccentricities. Apply
this rotating equipment loading on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y loads are 90 degrees out of
phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y load is zero, and when the Y load is at
its maximum the X load is zero.
ESTIMATED ECCENTRIC LOAD ON INLINE PUMP DOH-V33203001
750 X 0.0 350
750 Y 90.0 350
12 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Harmonic Displacements
Displacement
Amplitude of the harmonic displacement. The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine( t- ), where “D(t)” is the displacement as a function of time, A is the maximum
amplitude of the dynamic displacement. “ ” is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and
“ ” is the phase angle (in radians). Enter the displacements in the units shown.
Direction
Enter the line of action of the displacement as either X, Y, Z, or as direction cosines or direction vectors.
The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy,cz), i.e (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx,
vy, vz), i.e. (1,0,1).
Phase
Enter the phase angle in degrees. The harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacement at
time equal to zero, or the harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time
between zero and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t / , where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second. Most frequently
the phase angle is entered as either zero or 90. The phase specification is most useful when defining
eccentric displacements on rotating equipment. Some of the examples that follow discuss common
applications of the phase angle input. The phase angle is a required input. If the phase angle is zero, then 0.0
must be entered!
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 13
Start Node
Node where the dynamic displacement is defined. If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic
displacement will be assumed to act at the support point. If the node is not supported, then the dynamic
displacement will be assumed to describe the exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation
only becomes important when the node is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is
supported in the Y direction by a restraint having a stiffness of 5000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is
also specified at node 55, in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the
displacement that is attached to 55!
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
0.008 Y 0.0 330
0.003 Z 0.0 330
If the Start Node is entered without a Stop Node and Increment, then this node must exist in the piping
system. If the Start Node is entered with a Stop Node and Increment, then this range of nodes must include
at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Used as a part of a “range of nodes” force displacement loading. This entry is optional.
Increment
Used as a part of a “range of nodes” force displacement loading. This entry is optional.
EXAMPLES
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange in the Y direction a field
measured 8 mils, and in the Z direction an amount equal to 3 mils. Define these dynamic
displacements. The displacements are assumed to be simultaneous, with no phase shift. This is
because the load causing the displacements is believed to be the compressor plunger moving in the X,
or axial direction. (The displacements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the
compressor is itself skewed.)
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the harmonic force example did not
produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field personnel have measured the dynamic
displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z) directions at the pump piping connections. The
centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the horizontal suction and vertical discharge is node 15.
The magnitude of the Z displacement was measured to be 12 mil. The magnitude of the Y
displacement was measured to be 3 mils. It is assumed that the vibration is due to the rotation of the
pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken to be 90 degrees out of phase.
HARMONIC DISPLACEMENTS MODELING PUMP VIBRATION ON THE INLINE PUMP
DOH-V33203001. MODELLING THE PUMPS
DYNAMIC LOAD WITH FORCES DID NOT RESULT IN THE
DISPLACEMENTS WITNESSED BY FIELD PERSONNEL. NOW TRY
IMPOSING THE DISPLACEMENTS AND SEE WHAT THE RESULTING
FORCES ARE. ALSO CHECK TO SEE IF THE ATTACHED PIPING
MOVES AROUND AS EXPECTED.
Z MAGNITUDE OF THE LOAD - ZERO PHASE SHIFT
0.012 Z 0.0 15
14 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Spectrum Definitions
Name
Can be any 24-character identifier. This name is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile. The
complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range interpolation method,
ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table. Everything but the shock data point table
can be entered here. There are 14 predefined spectra for which no extra definitions are required and they
are:
El Centro
For the El Centro California N-S component taken from Biggs, “Introduction to Structural Dynamics,”
and applies for systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.
REG. GUIDE 1.60
1.60H.5 and 1.60V.5
1.60H2 and 1.60V2
1.60H5 and 1.60V5
1.60H7 and 1.60V7
1.60H1.0 and 1.60V10
16 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Each of these spectra define respectively the horizontal and vertical components for 0.5, 2, 5, 7, and 10
percent critically damped systems. Associated with each of these spectra is a value for the Maximum
ground acceleration at the site, the ZPA. (Zero Period Acceleration) This value defaults to 0.5 g and can
be changed on the control parameter spreadsheet.
Uniform Building Code
UBCSOIL1
UBCSOIL2
UBCSOIL3
These spectra represent the normalized (horizontal) response spectra for three soil types provided in
Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code, (1991 Edition).
Note The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum with no extension.
Entering the spectrum table in an ASCII file allows several jobs to access the same spectrum table data
without the user having to retype it for each job. If data is to be read directly from within the Dynamic
Output then click the Data Points button and enter the appropriate Range and Ordinate values.
Range Type
This entry defines the table “range”, or horizontal axis, and can be either “Period”, “Frequency”, or
"Time". If the range type is Period then the spectrum table data must be entered in seconds. If the range
type is Frequency then the spectrum table data must be entered in Hertz, (cycles per second). Time may be
used for Time History load profiles only, and must be entered in milliseconds (ms).
Ordinate Type
This entry defines the spectrum table “ordinate”, or vertical axis, and can be either Acceleration, Velocity,
Displacement or Force (multiplier). Any part of the word for the ordinate type can be spelled out, but only
the first letter is required. Note that acceleration units are length per second squared. Users may enter the
spectrum table in g’s by selecting acceleration as the ordinate type and then using a shock scale factor of
386., for length units of inches. For Time History load profiles, the only valid ordinate type is Force
(multiplier).
Range Interpolation
Interpolation between range values may be done logarithmically or linearly (valid input is LOG or LIN).
See the examples shown for additional discussion.
Ordinate Interpolation
Interpolation between ordinate values may be done logarithmically or linearly (valid input is LOG or
LIN). See the examples shown for additional discussion.
One job may have any number of different spectrum types and definitions.
Special FORCE spectrum data files are created by the DLF Spectrum generator. See the documentation
covering this item later in this chapter.
When a new job is started up the 14 predefined spectra are already included in the spectrum definition list.
Any combination of these predefined spectra may be used as is, deleted or used with any other user
defined spectra.
ASCII files that contain spectrum table data can contain comment lines starting with an asterisk just like
regular terminal entered data lines. The user is encouraged to include the basic spectrum data definitions
in the comments for each ASCII spectrum file. See the example that follows.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 17
EXAMPLE
The job requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a factor of 1.0, and in
the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
There is no spectrum definition required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its shock
data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
The job requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum acceleration
value of 0.25 g’s, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and vertical components of the
shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide 1.60 shock
spectra are predefined. The user must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of 0.25 g’s on the
control parameter spreadsheet, and must use the reg. guide spectra which corresponds to the anticipated
system damping. Lower damping values mean more conservative results.
The job requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A plot of the
spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is acceleration. From the
variation of the numbers along each axis it can be seen that a logarithmic interpolation for each axis
should be used. Because the shock name is NOT preceded by a (#) sign the user will have to enter the points
for this spectrum during this interactive input session.
BENCHNO4 PERIOD ACCELERATION LOG LOG
All jobs on a particular project require the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. Since we only want
to type the spectrum’s data points in one time, the points will be entered into a file named “BENCH1”.
The ASCII file BENCH1 can be created using any standard editor or the CAESAR II text editor. The
listing of the ASCII file for BENCH1 is shown following the plot of the spectrum.
The spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
#BENCH1 PERIOD ACCEL LOG LOG
0.2500E+00 0.8710E+03
0.3230E+00 0.4000E+03
Data points for user-defined spectra may be entered through the menu option Tools /Spectrum Data
Points.
Range
Spectrum table range value. There should be at least one range-ordinate pair for each spectrum.
Ordinate
Spectrum table ordinate value. There should be at least one range ordinate pair for each spectrum.
Values may be entered in exponential format (i.e. 0.3003E+03, or 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3,...), or can
have explicit multiplication or division (i.e. 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12). Sufficient data points should be
entered to fully describe the spectrum or load profile.
There can be any number of line entries in the spectrum data. Data may also be read from a file using the
Read From File button.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 19
Create Table
When the Create Table button is clicked, a dialog box will appear with the input table as displayed
below. Enter the Time / Force data and click the OK button to create the DLF curve on the hard drive.
Time
Enter the points that describe the time waveform to be modeled. Units for this table are milliseconds.
(1000 milliseconds equals one second.)
Force
Enter the forces that correspond to the points on the force/time curve. Units are as shown. Note that the
absolute magnitude of the force is not important, only the form of the time history loading is important.
The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force pattern defined in:
SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SETS.
There can be any number of line entries in the Excitation frequency data.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 21
Factor
Constant by which to multiply the shock table. Usually 1.0, or if the spectrum table data points were read
in units of g’s, to convert to in/sec/sec then this factor would be 386. There are several examples that
follow which illustrate various applications of this value.
22 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Direction
Defines the direction of application of the shock. To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must
know what the earthquake shock “looks like,” which comes from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II
must also know in which direction this shock acts. Typically a shock load case will be comprised of three
shock components. One acts in the X direction, one in the Z, and one in the Y. The combination of each of
these three “shocks” defines the earthquakes dynamic loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions may be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a shock
along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system lies along a 45 degree
line in the horizontal plane. An example shock input for this type of system is shown among the examples
on the following pages.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. i.e. there can be two X direction
components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions where one X direction
component would apply to one support group and another X direction component would apply to a
different support group. (However, there can be two shock components in the same direction without
having independent support contributions defined. This would just involve defining two shock
contributions in the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.)
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading there is only a single shock component in the load case, i.e.
there is only a single line of input on the load case screen. When there are multiple lines of input on the
load case screen, as when the user is analyzing a traveling pressure wave that impacts different elbow-
elbow pairs, there can be many components to the shock load case. The combination of responses from
each of these shock loading components can be established in one of two ways. If the Direction field is
the same for each load component, then the Directional Combination method will be used to combine the
responses from each load component. If the Direction field is different for each load component, then the
spatial combination method will be used to combine the responses from each load component. The
difference between Spatial and Directional combination methods is that Directional combinations are
always made before Modal combinations, while Spatial combinations can be made before or after Modal
combinations, (it is user controlled). The default is to perform the Modal combinations before Spatial
combinations. Either Spatial or Directional combinations can be made using the ABS or SRSS method.
Some of the following force spectrum examples illustrate these differences.
Note: Since Time History combinations are all algebraic (in-phase), this entry is used as nothing more
than a label during this type of analysis.
Force Set #
If the Spectrum/Load Profile Name describes a Force-type spectrum (rather than displacement, velocity,
or acceleration), then the fourth entry in the load case screen is the force set number. This force set
number corresponds to the loads entered in the Force Sets option. Examples shown on the following
pages illustrate this application. Note that if a force set # is entered, the last three fields must be left blank!
Start Node
Start node, stop node, and increment are only used to define the component of an independent support
shock (ISM). This is a shock component that applies only to a group of support points. For example,
different shock spectrum may have been generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping. In
this case the rack supports would be subject to one shock excitation (influenced by the rack’s response to
the earthquake), and the ground level supports would be subject to a different shock excitation (not
influenced by the rack). In this case, one node range would be used to define the rack support shock
contributions and another would be used to define the ground support shock contributions. The range of
nodes defined by the start node, stop node, and increment must include at least one support point.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 23
Stop Node
Part of the “range of nodes.” If omitted, defaults to the start node. See the examples that follow for
clarification.
Increment
Part of the “range of nodes.” If omitted, defaults to 1. See the examples that follows for clarification.
Anchor Movement (Earthquake Only)
This entry is only used for independent support movements. It is used to specify the absolute displacement
of the restraints included in this shock case. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
components representing the relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If omitted, the default is
taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: specified displacement,
velocity/frequency, or acceleration/frequency2 (where frequency is angular frequency).
Directives
A number of directives can be set for each individual load case using the Directives button. These
parameters are optional extensions to global options set for all load cases on the control parameter
spreadsheet. Typically the user will not need to specify any of these options.
24 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Directional Combination Method. Similar directional components will be combined using either the ABS or
the SRSS summation method. If there are two shock components in the X direction, the components from
each shock’s effect on the system will be summed absolutely. Directional combinations are performed
before all other combinations. (There are three types of combinations: DIRECTIONAL, SPATIAL AND
MODAL). The default DIRECTIONAL combination method is ABS.
Modal Combination Method.
Modal (Group) Modal components will be combined using the Reg. Guide 1.92 “GROUPING” method.
CAESAR II uses the Revision 1, February 1976 issue of the Regulatory Guide 1.92. See the discussion of
the SPATIAL(ABS) directive for a description of the relationship that exits between modal and spatial
response combinations.
Modal (10%) Modal components will be combined using the Reg. Guide 1.92 “10%” method.
Modal (DSRSS) Modal components will be combined using the Reg. Guide 1.92 “Double Square Root of
the Sum of the Squares” method. Damping is assumed to be equal for all modes and is taken from the
control parameter spreadsheet.
Modal (ABS) Modal components (response quantities) will be combined absolutely. (i.e. the absolute
value of each response quantity will be summed.)
Modal (SRSS) Modal components will be combined using the square root of the sum of the squares
method of combination.
Spatial Combination Method (ABS or SRSS). Spatial components will be combined using the ABS
summation method. There are typically three spatial components in a single earthquake type shock load
case. The three usual excitation directions are the X, Y, and Z global axes. (Although there can be any
number of spatial components along any global or skewed axes.)
Spatial or Modal Combination First. Modal before Spatial summations are “Independent.” An Independent
shock is one where the X, Y, Z components are random and temporally independent of one another. (i.e.
time histories for each directional component of the shock are not equal.) Spatial before Modal
summations are “Simultaneous.” A simultaneous shock is one where the X, Y, and Z components are
random, but temporarily the same (i.e. time histories for each directional component of the shock are
equal).
Pseudostatic Combination Method (ABS or SRSS). Pseudostatic components for each ISM are added into
the response quantities either absolutely or using the SRSS method of combination. Pseudostatic
combinations are performed after all spatial and modal combinations. The user can deactivate the
inclusion of pseudostatic component from the control parameter spreadsheet.
Missing Mass Combination Method (ABS or SRSS). Missing mass components for each shock load are
added into the response quantities either absolutely or using the SRSS method of combination. The user
can deactivate the inclusion of missing mass components from the control parameter spreadsheet. Missing
mass components are added in following modal summation.
Stress Type (EXP). Stress type for the load case is set using the stress type drop list. If FATigue is selected,
the expected number of load cycles must be entered. The user can change the default stress type dynamic
loads to any of the allowed stress types in CAESAR II. Available stress types are EXP, SUS, OCC, OPE,
and FAT. The OCC or occasional stress type is the default.
The entry of node groups causes a pseudostatic component of the shock to be created. This
pseudostatic contribution can be added or omitted from the final shock loading effects. Additional
parameters can be entered on the control parameter spreadsheet.
The order of input of the shock contributions is not important, and has no bearing on the results.
There is no limit to the number of shock load cases the user can define. The dynamic output processor
lets the user decide which of the Spectrum/Time History Load Cases he wants to process.
Any number of user comment lines may be included. There can be any number of line entries in the
spectrum data.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 25
EXAMPLES
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of one times the El Centro
earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667 times the El Centro
earthquake in the Y direction.
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO 0.667 Y
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical components of the
Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The maximum ground
acceleration should be 0.22 g’s.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the control parameter spreadsheet and has no effect on the
shock load case definitions.
1.60H2 1 X
1.60H2 1 Z
1.60V2 1 Y
Define a shock load case that is comprised of the users shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1 should
act in the X and Z directions, and shock BENCH2 should act in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.
BENCH1 1 X
BENCH2 1 Y
BENCH1 1 Z
One of the shock load cases for this particular job should excite the piping system along a line that is 45
degrees off of the global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation will
yield the worst possible results. Apply the user defined shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
BENCH1 1 (1,0,1)
BENCH1 1 (-1,0,1)
BENCH2 1 Y
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El Centro
earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases in this job. The first should
use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous.
The load cases would be defined as shown. (There are several ways to accomplish the same objective here
using parameters on the control parameter spreadsheet, etc. Only the method using the explicit definition
of the load case combination method will be presented.) Remember that independent summation means
MODAL then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS - CAESAR II’s title
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
26 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: “BLAST” contains the DLF
response spectrum for this relief valve’s firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1 contains
the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that would provide the most
conservative combination of modal results. (Because there is only a single loading there is no
consideration given to spatial or directional combinations.)
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will produce the
most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
There are two elbow-elbow pairs that are of significance in this job. Waterhammer loads act on the elbow
at 40 in the X direction and on the elbow at 135 in the Y-direction. In the SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY
FORCE SET input, force set #1 is defined as the load at 40 and force set #2 is defined as the load at 135.
Add the response quantities from each load component first, using an ABS summation, and then the
resulting modal response quantities second, using the grouping summation method. Two identical methods
for achieving the same results are shown.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, Force set #
BECAUSE THE “DIRECTION” INPUT IS THE SAME, I.E. “X”, FOR BOTH,
LOAD CONTRIBUTIONS, THE DIRECTIONAL COMBINATION METHOD
WILL GOVERN HOW THE HAMMER 40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES
ARE COMBINED.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, X, 2
DIRECTIONAL (ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
<or>
BECAUSE THE “DIRECTION” INPUT IS DIFFERENT, I.E. “X” AND “Y,”
THE SPATIAL COMBINATION METHOD WILL GOVERN HOW THE
HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES ARE COMBINED. NOTE THAT
ON THE DIRECTIVE LINE THE “SPATIAL” DIRECTIVE COMES BEFORE
THE “MODAL” DIRECTIVE.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, Y, 2
SPATIAL(ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
28 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Static/Dynamic Combinations
Load Case
Defines the static or dynamic load case that is to be a part of this combination case. The load case label
must always start with an S or a D for Static and Dynamic, and must be immediately followed by a load
case number. Valid entries are: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1, D#1, ...etc... The
user can use any length up to 24 characters to define the load case label so long as the name starts in an S
or a D, and ends in a valid load case number. For static load case definitions, the static case must exist and
have already been run (also, the S can’t refer to a spring hanger design case). For dynamic load case
definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case. Several examples are given as
follows.
Factor
This entry is required and multiplies the response quantities from the respective static or dynamic run.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 29
<Directive Data>
The Stress Type drop list or the Directive button may be used to set optional extensions to global options
set for all load cases on the control parameter spreadsheet. Typically the user will not need to specify any
of these options. Some of the examples included on the following pages illustrate cases where these
directives provide extra desired flexibility.
STRESSTYPE (EXP)
STRESSTYPE (SUS)
STRESSTYPE (OPE)
STRESSTYPE (OCC)
STRESSTYPE (FAT)
The user can change the default stress type for the combination case to any of the four shown here. The
default stress type is OCC - occasional.
COMBINATION (SRSS)
COMBINATION (ABS)
Defines how the load cases listed are to be combined. The ABS method takes the absolute value of all
displacement, force, and stress data for each load case and adds them together. The SRSS method sums
the square of all displacement, force, and stress data for each load case and then takes the square root of
the result.
Any number of separate static and dynamic cases can exist in the combination load case list provided
each reference to a static or dynamic case is on a separate line.
The order of input of the load case definitions is not important, and has no bearing on the results.
Any number of user comment lines may be included.
Static cases alone can be combined without dynamic cases.
Dynamic cases alone can be combined without static cases.
EXAMPLES:
The static cases run in the job were:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+F1 (OPE)
2 = W+P1+F1 (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
The dynamic cases run in the job were:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
The user must combine the Operating Basis Earthquake Stresses with the Sustained static stresses. The
specification for this combination case is:
STATIC2 1.0
DYNAMIC1 1.0
<or>
S2 1
D1 1
The static cases run in the job were:
1 = W + P1 + F1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + F1 (For hanger design)
30 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + F1 (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + F1 (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There was one dynamic load case. The user is required to turn an occasional case that is the sum of the
sustained and the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination
method. Additionally, the user must combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the
SRSS combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. Note that since the job had
hanger design the first two static load cases cannot be used in a combination case. The input for each case
is shown as follows:
COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
COMBINATION CASE 2:
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(ABS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
COMBINATION CASE 3:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
STATIC5 1
DYNAMIC1 1
COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION(SRSS), STRESSTYPE(OCC)
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 31
STATIC1 1
STATIC3 1
COMBINATION CASE 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC4 0.5
DYNAMIC5 0.5
DYNAMIC6 1.333
32 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
For a Time History analysis, the load profile used in step 2 would be entered directly in step 3, with the
rest of the process remaining the same.
Any number of user comment lines may be included. There can be any number of line entries in the Force
spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, the user should be
particularly careful with the combination method selected. In this case, the same rules that cover
earthquake shocks and components apply to force spectrum shocks and components.
EXAMPLES:
The nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform. The
dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same for all three
nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370 lb., and on node 15 is
30,537 lb. Three force sets are to be built for this problem. One is with the dynamic loads acting in the X
direction. One is with the dynamic loads acting in the Z direction, and the third is with the dynamic loads
acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The force spectrum input data for this job is as follows:
* X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 1
10370 X 10 1
30537 X 15 1
* Z DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 Z 5 2
10370 Z 10 2
30537 Z 15 2
* X AND Z DIRECTION WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 3
5030 Z 5 3
10370 X 10 3
10370 Z 10 3
30537 X 15 3
30537 Z 15 3
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for several different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. This is a ramped time waveform.
The valve opens and closes in 5 milliseconds. The duration for the first decompression condition is 50
milliseconds. The maximum load for the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction.
This also is a ramped time waveform. The valve opens and closes in 5 milliseconds and the duration for
the second decompression condition is 4 seconds. The third decompression condition maximum load is 50
kips, and has the same time waveform as the second condition. (It is this decompression state that is
expected to be the most frequent.)
There must be two shock tables defined, one for the 50 ms duration waveform, and one for the 4 second
duration waveform. Three different maximum force patterns are defined:
* REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
320000 X 565 1
* REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 2
150000 X 565 2
* REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 3 (MOST FREQUENT)
34 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
50000 X 565 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5, 10, and 15.
The system is shown as follows:
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 35
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5. When the
shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 element balances the initial imbalance at node
5, and there becomes an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock load will be modelled as two
completely separate impacts on the piping system The first is the dynamic anchor load at 5. (If 5 is a
flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be
subject to the dynamic time history pulse due to the shock.) Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel
nozzle. The second shock load is the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists
until the shock reaches the node 15. Friction in the line resisting movement of the shock wave is
considerable. In the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10 there is a 50%
drop in the pulse strength as shown in the following plot.
36 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
This pressure drop was computed using a transient fluid simulator. Between node 10 and node 15 the
pulse strength drops even further as shown as follows.
Lumped Masses
Lumped Masses
Mass
Enter the concentrated mass in the units shown, a positive concentrated mass is added to the mass at the
node. A negative concentrated mass is subtracted from the mass at the node and a zero entry deletes all
mass for the node.
Direction
Can be X, Y, Z, or ALL. ALL can be abbreviated “A”. If X, Y, or Z is entered, then the mass is only
added or subtracted for that direction.
Start Node
Node where the mass is to act. This entry is required. If entered without a stop node and increment, then
this node must exist in the piping system. If entered with a stop node and increment then the range of
nodes identified by the loop must include at least one node in the piping system. See the examples that
follow.
Stop Node
Used as part of a “range of nodes” lumped mass command. See the examples that follow. This entry is
optional.
38 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Increment
Used as part of a “range of nodes” lumped mass command. See the examples that follow. This entry is
optional.
There can be any number of line entries in the lumped mass data.
The zero mass capability with the “range of nodes” entry is particularly useful when the user has a part of
the system for which he is not interested in the modes. That part of the system would have been modeled
for its stiffness effect only. One example is structural steel models. It is not uncommon for a user to delete
all of the mass for nodes in the structural steel model. (Steel models are often only entered to include their
stiffness effects and so the omission of their dynamic effects is often not significant.)
EXAMPLES:
450 ALL 40
Note: The node range loop starts from node 12, which is not defined and goes through node 25 in steps
of 1. Some nodes don’t exist in this range but this is not an error as long as at least one node in the range
defined by 12 through 25 by 1, exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1
Snubbers
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 39
Snubbers
Stiffness
Enter the stiffness for the snubber in the units shown. If the snubber is rigid enter a value of 1.0E12. The
stiffness of the snubber must be given and must be positive.
Direction
Enter the line of action of the snubber as either X, Y, Z, or as direction cosines or direction vectors. The
format for direction cosines is (cx,cy,cz), and for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz). See the example that
follows for the entry of some typical skewed snubbers.
Node
Enter the node where the snubber acts. This is a required entry. If the snubber acts between the piping
system and a fixed point in space, then leave the CNode field blank. Connecting Nodes work for snubbers
just like they do for restraints.
CNode
If the snubber acts between one point on the piping system and another point on the piping system, then
enter the node that the snubber connects to.
EXAMPLES:
3 Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005
4 Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber should
connect to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber should connect to the overhead line at
node 743.
HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL 5000 X 500 1050.
VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE 5000 Y 500 743
40 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Control Parameters
The type of analysis chosen by the user in the Dynamic Input Processor determines the active Control
Parameters. CAESAR II will display only this list of active Control Parameters. In addition, the calculation
details can be fine-tuned using many of the other Control Parameters, maximizing accuracy of results for
most dynamic problems. The impact and use of these parameters, as well as their technical bases, are
described in this section.
The list of the control parameters, along with the Analysis Types for which they are active, is shown in the
following table.
Notes:
X-required
1-if system has nonlinear restraints or hanger design
2-if any restraints have friction
3-either "Max. No. of Eigenvalues" or "Frequency Cutoff" required
4-if modal combination method is GROUP or 10%
5-if modal combination method is DSRSS
6-if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are used
42 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
M = system mass matrix
Unfortunately, this differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases.
Harmonic analysis looks at one of these cases—the set of dynamic problems where the forces or
displacements (i.e., pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. Under
harmonic loading, when damping is zero, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos ( t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
= angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation can be solved directly, yielding the nodal displacements at any time (and
therefrom, the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses).
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos ( t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Since acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A 2
cos t
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 43
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic equation of
motion yields,
-M A 2
cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),
-M A 2
+ K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
(K - M ) A = Fo
2
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems. The
appealing thing about this is that the solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a
single static solution, and, when there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results give the
maximum dynamic responses directly. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so
directly applicable, it is advisable to make as much use of this capability as possible. Two considerations
must be kept in mind:
When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix can be
defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), i.e.:
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the constants a and b is
given as
Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored. Therefore the definition of reduces
to
= 2 Cc/
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis; however there are still two
problems. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there must be only
a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second problem is that the modal
frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping matrix. Therefore the w used in the
calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load, instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the
forcing frequency of the load is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the
true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously, and they are not in phase, system response is the
sum of the responses due to the individual loads:
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
44 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Rather, solutions for each load, and the sum
of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations should then be reviewed in
order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively, CAESAR II can select the
frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Note: Damped harmonics will always cause a phased response.
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations resulting from
either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The approach typically taken
towards solving this type of problem is described briefly below:
1 A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field—either in terms of large cyclic vibrations
or high stresses (fatigue failure) being present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (quantifiable
displacements, overstress points, etc.) are identified as possible, for future use in refining the dynamic
model.
2 A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately as possible,
since system, as well as load, characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed response.
Particular attention should be paid when modeling the area where the vibration occurs. This might
include accurately representing valve operators, flange pairs, orifice plates and other in-line
equipment. It may also be a good idea to add additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3 The engineer next postulates the cause of the load, and from that, an estimate of the frequency,
magnitude, point, and direction of the load. This is somewhat difficult because the dynamic loads can
come from many sources. Dynamic loads may be due to internal pressure pulses, external vibration,
flow shedding at intersections, two phase flow, etc., but in almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical natural
frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably some multiple of
the operating frequency; if the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then the forcing frequency can
be estimated through the use of Strouhal’s equations (from fluid dynamics). Using the best
assumptions available, the user should estimate the magnitudes and points of application of the
dynamic load.
4 The loading is then modeled using harmonic forces or displacements (normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration) and several harmonic analyses are done,
sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency (in order to account for
uncertainty). The results of each of the analyses are examined for signs of large displacements,
indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, the results of the analysis are compared to
the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar (or if there is no resonance), this indicates
that the dynamic model is not a good one, so it must be improved, either in terms of a more accurate
system (static) model, a better estimate of the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range.
Once the model has been refined, this step is repeated until the mathematical model behaves just like
the actual piping system in the field.
5 At this time, there is a good model of the piping system and a good model of the loads (or, more
accurately, a good model of the relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics).
The results of this run are evaluated in order to determine whether they indicate a problem. Since
harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit of the piping
material; displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or esthetic guidelines.
6 If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified, where the cause is normally
the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor for a single
damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:
DLF = dynamic loading factor
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 45
Spectrum Analysis
A spectrum analysis represents an attempt to estimate the maximum response developed in a system
during a transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maximum displacements, forces,
reactions, stresses, etc; the individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading case in that the
maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially useful when the loading profile
is random, or otherwise not known exactly, such as with seismic loads. CAESAR II provides the ability to
perform two types of spectrum analyses (which may be combined): for seismic and force loadings.
Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over the entire system, or applied through individual
support groups (with corresponding anchor movements). Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze
impulse loadings, such as those due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow. These two types are
described in the following paragraphs.
Seismic Spectrum Analysis. Seismic loads cannot be solved through time history analyses, since
earthquakes cause random motion, which may be different for each earthquake, even those occurring at
the same site. To simplify the analytical definition of the earthquake, it is necessary to get the expected
random waveform of acceleration (or velocity or displacement) vs. time into some simple frequency-
content plot. The most predominantly used frequency-content plot is the response spectrum. A response
spectrum for an earthquake load can be developed by placing a series of single degree-of-freedom
oscillators on a mechanical shake table and feeding a “typical” (typical for a specific site) earthquake time
history through it, measuring the maximum response (displacement, velocity, or acceleration) of each
oscillator.
The expectation is that even though all earthquakes are different, similar ones should produce the same
maximum responses, even though the time at which they occur will differ with each individual
occurrence. (Responses will be based on the maximum ground displacement and acceleration, the
dynamic load factors determined by the ratios of the predominant harmonic frequencies of the earthquake
to the natural frequencies of the oscillators, and system damping.) Response spectra for a number of
damping values can be generated by plotting the maximum response for each oscillator. A plot of a set of
typical response spectra is shown in the following figure.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 47
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, since seismic loads evidence
strong harmonic tendencies. As damping value increases, the system response approaches the ground
motion. Seismic spectra usually also show strong evidence of flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra
may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the building and/or piping system; however multiple peaks are
usually enveloped in order to account for uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are
typically spread to account for inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that a system’s modes of vibration will respond
to the load in the exact same manner as will a single degree-of-freedom oscillator. System response may
be plotted in terms of displacement, velocity, or acceleration, since these terms of the spectra are all
related by the frequency:
d=v/ =a/ 2
Where:
d = displacement from response spectrum at frequency
v = velocity from response spectrum at frequency
= angular frequency at which response spectrum parameters are taken
a = acceleration from response spectrum at frequency
Response Spectrum analysis proceeds according to the following steps:
1 Modes of vibration are extracted from the system using an Eigensolver algorithm. Each mode has a
characteristic frequency and mode shape.
2 The maximum response of each mode under the applied load is determined from the spectrum value
corresponding to the mode’s natural frequency.
3 The total system response is determined by summing the individual modal responses, using methods
that reflect the time independence of the responses and the portion of system mass allocated to each
mode.
There are four major sources of earthquake spectra available to the CAESAR II user:
Predefined El Centro (available in the CAESAR II database—spectrum name = ELCENTRO): This
data is taken from J. Biggs’ Introduction to Structural Dynamics and is based on the north-south
component of the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake. The recorded maximum acceleration
was 0.33 g. The spectrum provided here is intended to apply to elastic systems having 5 to 10 percent
critical damping.
Predefined Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Available in the CAESAR II database): The predefined
spectrum names are:
1.60H.5 1.60V.5 -- Horizontal/vertical,0.5% damping
1.60H2 1.60V2 -- Horizontal/vertical,2.0% damping
1.60H5 1.60V5 -- Horizontal/vertical,5.0% damping
1.60H7 1.60V7 -- Horizontal/vertical,7.0% damping
1.60H10 1.60V10 -- Horizontal/vertical,10.0% damping
These spectra are constructed according to the instructions given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 for seismic
design of nuclear plants. They must also be scaled up or down by the maximum ground acceleration
(ZPA—zero period acceleration), which can be specified in the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
Predefined Uniform Building Code (Available in the CAESAR II database). The predefined spectrum
names are:
UBCSOIL1 Spectrum for rock and stiff soils
UBCSOIL2 Spectrum for deep cohesionless or stiff clay soils
48 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Shock Name Factor Dir Start Node Stop Node Incr Anchor Mvmt
Name, Factor, and Direction are all that is entered for uniform support excitations. For ISM type shocks,
the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using the Start Node, Stop Node,
and Increment entries. The Anchor Movement entry is used to explicitly define the seismic displacement
of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components. If omitted, the
program defaults to the displacement derived from the response spectrum entry corresponding to the
lowest frequency.
Force Spectrum Analysis. A similar method can be followed for non-random loads, such as an impulse
load for which the force vs. time profile is known. A look at the equation for the earthquake problem
explains why the force spectrum solution is very similar to the earthquake solution:
The term on the right hand side is nothing more than a dynamic force acting on the piping system, i.e. F =
Ma, so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 49
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a Dynamic
Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the ratio of the
maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. Whereas the earthquake
response spectrum analysis method started with the time history of an earthquake excitation, the force
spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way—except that the analysis starts with the force
vs. time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history loading can be applied to a shake table of
single degree-of-freedom bodies, with a response spectrum (in this case, DLF vs. natural frequency) being
generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements by the static displacements expected under
the same load. An alternate means of generating a response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically
integrate the dynamic equation of motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load.
This can be done using the Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generator available from the CAESAR II Main
Dynamics Menu.
The user may process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use of the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation factors,
included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report form. Dynamic results
also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and shock load responsible for that
contribution.
Animation of the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.
Modal Extraction. A modal extraction performs only an Eigensolution (an eigensolution is also performed
as the initial step of the spectrum or modal time history analyses). The Eigensolution algorithm uses an
iterative method to solve for natural frequencies and mode shapes of a piping or structural system. Each
mode of the piping system is associated with a shape and a frequency, which together define the system’s
tendency to vibrate; the mode shape defining the shape the system would like to take when it vibrates, and
the natural frequency defining the desired speed of the vibration. The eigensolver returns a set of these for
each mode, with the dimensionless mode shape called an eigenvector, and the frequency returned as the
square of the angular frequency ( 2), known as the eigenvalue. Given the eigenvalue, the modal
frequency can be expressed in angular frequency (radians per second), cyclic frequency (Hz), or period
(seconds per cycle):
eigenvalue = 2 (radians squared per second squared)
angular frequency = (radians per second)
cyclic frequency = / 2 (Hz, or cycles per second)
period = 2 / (seconds per cycle)
The absolute magnitude of a mode shape displacement computed by an eigensolver is unknown, with only
the shape being given (i.e. only the ratios of the displacements at various degrees of freedom are known
for each mode, with these ratios being constant for each mode). One eigenpair can potentially be
calculated for each degree of freedom in the model that contains some nonzero mass (node point) and
some non-rigid stiffness (i.e., is not fully restrained). CAESAR II omits rotational degrees of freedom from
dynamic models in order to simplify the calculation—this is usually acceptable since rotational modes of
vibration usually have very high frequencies, and correspondingly very low mode participation factors.
The user may process output from a modal analysis in two ways:
Use of the output processor to review the natural frequencies and mode shapes in report form.
Animation of the individual mode shapes.
50 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than is
response spectrum analysis, and is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings where the
profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic equation of motion
throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration, providing a true simulation
of the system response at all times.
As noted previously, the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric techniques by
slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Based on an assumption of the behavior of the
system between time slices (i.e., that the change in acceleration between time slices is linear), the system
accelerations, velocities, displacements, and correspondingly, the reactions, internal forces, and stresses
can be calculated at successive time steps.
Since the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its individual modes of
vibration, the above equation can be simplified (assuming the damping matrix C is orthogonal), using the
transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
This transformation represents N (where N is the number of modes of vibration extracted) uncoupled
second order differential equations, which can then be integrated and summed (using the in-phase,
algebraic summation method) to give the total system response. The CAESAR II program uses the Wilson
method (an extension of the Newmark method) to integrate the equations of motion, which provides an
unconditionally stable algorithm, regardless of time step size chosen.
Only one dynamic load may be defined for a time history analysis (this dynamic load case may be used in
as many static/dynamic combination load case as necessary). However, the single load case may consist of
multiple force profiles applied to the system simultaneously, or sequentially. Each force vs. time profile is
entered as a spectrum with an ordinate of FORCE (in current units) and a range of TIME (in milliseconds).
The profiles are defined by entering the time and force coordinates of the corner points defining the
profile. (Note that a time can only be entered once, and that times with zero force outside of the defined
profile need not be entered explicitly.)
For example, the profiles shown in the following figure are entered as:
The load profiles must then be linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product of the
profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
Currently only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, may be entered in the time history load
profile. However, moments can be modeled using force couples, and restraint displacements can be
simulated by entering forces equal to the desired displacement times the restraint stiffness in the direction
of the displacement).
The user may process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
1 Use of the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation factors,
included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report form. CAESAR II’s
implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results—one results case containing the
maximum individual components (axial stress, X-displacement, MZ reaction, etc.) of the system
response, along with the time at which it occurred, and several (the actual number is determined by
user request) results cases representing the actual system response at specific times. Dynamic results
also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient load responsible for that
contribution.
2 Animation of the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual elements may be
displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the static/dynamic
combinations.
3 Animation of the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.
52 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
% Active MassY =
summed over 1 = 2 to n, by 6
(Y-direction degrees of freedom)
% Active Massz =
summed over 1 = 3 to n, by 6
(Z-direction degrees of freedom)
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix
The maximum possible percent of active mass which is theoretically possible is of course 100%, with 90-
95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a good dynamic
model.
The percent of active force is calculated by the following factors:
separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three directional
degrees-of-freedom
combining them algebraically
doing the same for the applied load
taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load
For example:
Fex = Fe[i]
Fx = F[i]
summed over i = 1 to n, by 6
(X - direction degrees of freedom)
Fey = Fe[i]
Fy = F[i]
summed over i = 2 to n, by 6
(Y - direction degrees of freedom)
Fez = Fe[i]
Fz = F[i]
summed over i = 3 to n, by 6
(Z - direction degrees of freedom)
% Active Force =
Where:
FeX,FeY,FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX,FY,FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes,
respectively
56 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or the previous one
must be entered.
58 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, a is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the relationships to:
=0 = 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception that a single
b is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the w used is that of the load forcing
frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives an accurate
estimate of the true damping value.
60 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
When performing Time History analysis, this parameter is used to specify the number of distinct times at
which the results of the load cases (the dynamic load as well as all static/dynamic combinations) should be
generated. In addition, CAESAR II generates one set of results (for each load case) containing the maximum
of each output value (displacement, force, stress, etc.) along with the time at which it occurred. The times
for which results are generated are determined by dividing as evenly as possible the load duration by the
number of output times—for example, if the load duration is 1 second, and 5 output cases are requested,
results will be available at 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 milliseconds (in addition to the maximum case).
The total number of results cases generated for an analysis is the product of the number of load cases (one
dynamic case plus the number of static/dynamic combination cases) times the number of results cases per
load (one maxima case plus the requested number of output cases). Currently the total number of results
cases is limited to 99:
(1 + # Static/Dynamic Combinations) x (1 + # Output Cases) <= 99
At least one output case (in addition to the automatically generated maxima case) must be requested; more
than one is not really necessary, since the worst case results are reflected in the Maxima case and
individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT command when animating the
Time History results.
Where:
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the ith and jth mode, respectively, where
mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
Where:
(fi, fj) / fi = frequencies of modes i and j, respectively
Note: The 10% figure controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies may be changed by using the
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) parameter. (See description in corresponding
section earlier in this chapter).
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient
= [ 1 + {( k'- ') /(ßk'
s k + ßs' )}2 ]-1
s
' =
k k [ 1 - ßk2 ]1/2
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 67
' =
s s [ 1 - ßs2 ]1/2
ßk' = ßk + 2 / ( td k )
ßs' = ßs + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
ßk = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
ßs = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
Note: The load duration (td) and the damping ratio (ß) may be specified by using the Load Duration
(Time History or DSRSS method) (sec.) and Damping (Time History or DSRSS) (ratio of critical) parameters
described in the corresponding sections found earlier in this chapter.
Absolute Method
This method states that the total system response is equal to the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. (This is effectively the same as using the DSRSS method with all correlation
coefficients equal to 1.0, or the Grouping method, with all modes being closely spaced.) The total system
response is calculated as:
R=
This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum modal responses
occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is usually overly-conservative,
since modes with different natural frequencies will probably experience their maximum DLF at different
times during the load profile.
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS)
This method states that the total system response is equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of
the individual modal responses. (This is effectively the same as using the DSRSS method with all
correlation coefficients equal to 0.0, or the Grouping method, with none of the modes being closely
spaced.) The total system response is calculated as:
R=
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely independent,
with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration of the applied load.
This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close frequencies, since those
modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approximately the same time during the load
profile.
Note: Since all Time History combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this parameter has no
effect on Time History results.
68 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The Sturm Sequence check would fail in the case where there are two identical frequencies at the last
frequency extracted. The significance of this failure can only be estimated by the user. For example,
consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
0.6637 1.2355 1.5988 4.5667 4.5667
If the user asks for only the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm Sequence failure would occur because
there are five frequencies, rather than four, which exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p
calculates to 0.0041). To correct this problem, the user can do either of the following:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is reported by the
Sturm Sequence Check.)
Increase the cutoff frequency some small amount, if the frequency cutoff terminated the
eigensolution. This will usually allow the lost modes to fall into the solution frequency range.
Fix the subface size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation vectors improves the
possibility that at least one of them will contain some component of the missing modes, allowing the
vector to properly converge.
The default here is “Yes,” and should be left alone unless the user has some specific reason for
deactivating the check.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 71
Advanced Parameters
in the current subspace. A slow convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of approximately
one, and a fast convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of zero. The shift is employed to get
the convergence rate as close to zero as possible. The cost of each shift is one decomposition of the system
set of equations. The typical shift value is equal to the last computed eigenvalue plus 90 percent of the
difference between this value and the lowest estimated eigenvalue still nonconverged in the subspace. As
w1 is shifted closer to zero, the ratio w1/w2 will become increasingly smaller thus increasing the
convergence rate. In certain instances where eigenvalues are very closely spaced, shifting can result in
eigenvalues being lost (the Sturm Sequence Check will detect this condition). A large value entered for
this parameter will effectively disable shifting, so no eigenvalues will be missed; however, the solution
will take longer to run. When the system to be analyzed is very large, shifting the set of equations can be
very time consuming—in these cases, the user is advised to set this parameter to somewhere between 4
and 8.
Pulsation Loads
Unexpectedly, and sometimes after support changes or process modifications, an operating line will begin
experiencing large amplitude, low frequency vibration. The first step in the solution is the construction of
the dynamic model. Particular attention should be paid when modeling the piping system in the area of the
field vibration. This might include accurately representing valve operators, in-line flange pairs, orifice
plates and measuring equipment. It is also a good idea to add extra nodes in the area where vibration is
experienced. The extra nodes would be put at bend “near” nodes and at span midpoints.
The next step is the eigenvalue/eigenvector extraction. If the system is large, then degrees of freedom far
removed from the area of local vibration should be eliminated. (6-10) natural frequencies should be
extracted. Natural frequencies and mode shapes define the systems “tendency to vibrate.” The mode
shapes extracted should show how the system in the area of the local vibration problem is tending to
displace. In most cases acoustic resonances are coupled with mechanical resonances to produce the large
amplitude vibrations experienced in the field.
Very typically one of the first mode shapes will show exactly the shape displayed by the pipe vibrating in
the field. If the mode shapes extracted do not show movement in the area of the local vibration, then not
enough degrees of freedom were removed from other areas. If the lowest mode shape in the area of the
local vibration problem is above (15) Hz. then there is a good possibility that either the vibration is
mechanically induced or the fluid pulsation peak pressures are very high. Either of these cases may
represent critical situations which should be evaluated by an expert.
When the mode shape is identified which corresponds to the observed field vibration, the pulsation load
model can be developed. Pulsation loads will exist at closed ends, at bends, and at changes in diameter.
Harmonically varying forces are put at these points in an attempt to get the mathematical model to vibrate
like the real piping system.
The driving frequency for the applied harmonic load should be equal to the frequency that pressure pulses
are introduced into the line.
The magnitude of the harmonic load can be estimated within a range of tolerances. The actual design
value is selected from this range such that resulting displacements of the model are close to those observed
in the field.
Output from the harmonic analysis can be processed in the static output processor and maximum restraint
loads due to the dynamic forces calculated.
It is critical when redesigning supports for dynamic loads that static thermal criteria are not violated by
any new support configuration designed.
Important Static thermal criteria and dynamic displacement criteria must be satisfied
simultaneously.
The ultimate objective of the harmonic analysis will be to find the elbow pair whose unbalanced load
results in the observed field vibration.
Unbalanced loads exist between adjacent elbows because the pressure peak in the traveling wave hits each
elbow at a slightly different time.
If the pressure at elbow “a” is denoted by Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow “b” is denoted by Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force which acts along the pipe connecting the two elbows is:
F = A * Pa(t) - A * Pb(t)EQ. (1)
where A is the inside area of the pipe. The expression for Pa(t) can be found assuming the pressure peak
hits the elbow “a” at time t = 0:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t.EQ. (2)
76 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
where:
(Pavg) - average pressure in the line,
(dP) - alternating component of the pressure, (Pmax-Pmin)
( ) - driving frequency.
If the straight pipe between the elbows “a” and “b” is (L) inches long, then the pressure peak that has just
passed elbow “a” will get to elbow “b” (ts) seconds later, where
(ts) = (L) / c,
(c) being the speed of sound in the fluid. (Remember, pressure pulses travel at the speed of sound, not the
speed of the fluid ! ! !) The expression for the pressure at “b” can now be written:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t + Q). EQ.(3)
Q is the phase shift between the pressure peaks at “a” and “b”,
Q = w * (ts). (Where Q is in radians, and w is in radians/second)
Combining equations 1, 2, and 3 the unbalanced pressure force can be written:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos ( t-Q) ]
This function has a maximum:
Fmax = 0.5(dP)A sin Q/cos (Q/2)
and a period of 1/w, and will be approximated with:
f(t) = 0.5(dP)A (sin Q/cos (Q/2)) cos wt
The formulation of the harmonic loads can be summarized as follows:
1 Decide which elbow-elbow pair is most likely to have an unbalanced force which could cause the
displacements observed in the field.
2 Find upper and lower estimates for the following variables:
dP—Alternating pressure in the line (Pmax - Pmin)
—Driving frequency.
c—Speed of sound in the fluid.
L—Length between the two elbows.
A—Area of the pipe.
3. Find the time it takes the pressure wave to get from one elbow to the other.
ts = L / (c-)
(c-) is the lower estimate for the speed of sound in the fluid.
4. Find the largest estimated magnitude of the unbalanced pressure force:
Fmax = (0.5) (dP+)A * sin [( +) (ts)] / cos [( t) (ts)/2]
(dP+) is the upper estimate for the alternating pressure.
( +) is the upper estimate for the driving frequency.
5. Run a single harmonic analysis with a force of F = Fmax [cos ( t)] acting along the axis of the pipe
between the two elbows. If the pattern of the displacement approximately that seen in the field, and if the
magnitude of the calculated displacement is greater than or equal to the magnitude of the displacement in
the field, then the harmonic load to be used for the design of the new restraints has been found.
Chapter 5 Controlling the Dynamic Solution 77
The input for the gas relief load synthesis is shown as follows:
Line Temperature
Enter the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. (Usually just the gas temperature
upstream of the relief valve.)
Line Pressure
Enter the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. (Usually just the gas pressure upstream of the relief
valve.) Note that stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow velocity
in the line is high.
ID of Relief Valve Orifice
Enter the flow passage inside diameter for the smallest diameter in the relief valve throat. (This
information is usually provided by the relief valve manufacturer).
ID of Relief Valve Piping
Enter the inside diameter of the piping attached directly to the exhaust of the relief valve.
ID of Vent Stack Piping
If CAESAR II is to size the vent stack then leave this ID blank. If the vent stack piping is the same size as
the relief valve piping, i.e. it is one-in-the-same, then this field may be left blank. Otherwise enter the
inside diameter of the vent stack piping.
Length of the Vent Stack
Enter the length of the vent stack. This is a required entry. Add double the lengths of fittings and elbows
(or compute the appropriate equivalent lengths for non-pipe fittings and add the lengths).
Some typical values for these constants are given below:
Propane 1.127
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack interface
thrust acts in this configuration.
The input for the liquid relief load synthesis is shown as follows:
Note: If the “L” dimensions are significant in any of the previous figures (several feet) then unbalanced
thrust loads will act between the elbow-elbow pairs that is very similar to a water hammer load. Water
hammer pulses travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface “pulses”
travel at the velocity of the flowing fluid. For this reason, these unbalanced loads can cause significant
piping displacements in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the
computed thrust and the duration may be found from the computed fluid velocity and distance between
each elbow-elbow pair.
1
CHAPTER 6
Technical Discussions
In This Chapter
Rigid Element Application ..........................................................2
Cold Spring .................................................................................4
Expansion Joints..........................................................................6
Hanger Sizing Algorithm.............................................................8
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities.........................................................11
Modeling Friction Effects ...........................................................14
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................15
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints ...............................16
Static Seismic Loads ...................................................................20
Wind Loads .................................................................................22
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ..............................25
References ...................................................................................37
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ..........................................................38
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction.........................................43
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II............................................47
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping.............................................61
Code Compliance Considerations ...............................................82
Local Coordinates .......................................................................113
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The user’s entered weight for the rigid element is not reflected in the Thermal Expansion/Pipe Weight
Report optionally printed during error checking.
Stresses are not calculated on Rigid elements since they are often used to simulate components that have
variable cross-sections along the length of the element, i.e. a valve, and is normally not of concern for this
type of analysis anyway. Forces and Moments are not normally printed on nodes between two rigid
elements, but can be by selecting the appropriate check box found in Kaux-Special Execution Parameters
from the Piping Input Spreadsheet.
Zero-weight rigids ("dummy" rigids) are often used to model components whose weight is not important
to the analysis, but where thermal growth may be a consideration. Dummy rigids are often used to model
restraints. Tie rods in an expansion joint, rod hangers, and trunnions are examples of restraints modeled as
dummy rigids. Dummy rigids may also be used to provide connectivity between the center line of an
element and its outside edge. The most common example of this is the addition of a dummy rigid that runs
from the node at the center line of the vessel to the edge where a nozzle is to be connected. Sometimes
equipment is modeled through a series of rigid elements. This is particularly true when multiple nozzles
are attached and the equipment is restrained such that the interactions between the various nozzles must
be taken into account due to the thermal growth of the attached piping system. The use of dummy rigids is
explained in the CAESAR II Applications Guide in various sections as appropriate to a particular modeling
technique.
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Cold Spring
Cold spring is the process of offsetting (or pre-loading) the piping system with displacement loads
(usually accomplished by cutting short or long the pipe runs between two anchors) for the purpose of
reducing the absolute expansion load on the system. Cold spring is used to do the following:
hasten the thermal shakedown of the system in fewer operating cycles
reduce the magnitude of loads on equipment and restraints, since often, only a single application of a
large load is sufficient to damage these elements
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
RUN # 1
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for Code Stress check
Load Case4 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
Cold spring is allowed to reduce the magnitude of equipment loads because, often, only a single
application of a large load is sufficient to cause damage to rotating machinery.
Cold spring does not change the “range” of stresses that the piping system is subject to, and so, no
allowance is given for stress reduction. (The maximum value of the stress is lowered, but the range is
unchanged.)
Both the sustained loads and the operating loads should be within the manufacturer’s allowables for the
particular piece of equipment. If the designer isn't careful, the installation of the cold spring in the ambient
state can overload a piece of rotating equipment as the unit starts up.
6 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Expansion Joints
To define an expansion joint, activate the Expansion Joint check box (see "Expansion Joints" on page
17) on the pipe element spreadsheet.
Expansion joint elements may have a zero or nonzero length. The expansion joint will have a zero length
if the Delta fields in the spreadsheet are left blank or zero. The expansion joint will have a nonzero length
if at least one of the element’s spreadsheet Delta fields is non-blank and non-zero. When an expansion
joint has a finite length CAESAR II evenly distributes the expansion joint stiffnesses over the entire length
of the element. This will usually result in a more accurate stiffness model in what is typically a very
sensitive area of the piping system.
Four stiffnesses define the expansion joint
Axial Stiffness
Transverse Stiffness
Bending Stiffness
Torsional Stiffness
These stiffnesses are defined as shown in the following figure:
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 7
The transverse and the bending stiffnesses are directly related when a finite length joint is defined. In this
case the bending stiffness should be left blank and the transverse stiffness entered. CAESAR II will
compute the proper bending stiffness from the relationship between the bending and transverse stiffnesses.
Bending stiffnesses from manufacturers catalogs should generally only be entered for zero length
expansion joints modeling hinges or gimbals. Before a manufacturers bending stiffness is used for a finite
length bellows it should be multiplied by 4.0 (note that in this case the transverse stiffness would be left
blank).
Torsional stiffnesses are often not given by expansion joint manufacturers. In this case the user is
recommended to insert a large torsional stiffness value and ensure that the resulting load on the bellows is
not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter large, the magnitude of this “large”
torsional stiffness can significantly effect the magnitude of the torsion carried by the bellows, i.e.
stiffnesses of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg. can produce considerably different torsional load
results. The tendency would be to go with the larger stiffness, i.e. being conservative, except that the
torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the 100,000 in.lb./deg. In the instance where the “largeness”
of the torsional stiffness value is important, the manufacturer should be pressed for his “best-guess” at the
stiffness, or the following equation should be used to get an estimate, which the user can then
conservatively increase to get reasonable torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding equipment.
The equation for estimating bellows torsional stiffness is
Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
E = Elastic Modulus
= Poisson’s Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses are related. The user
must be sure that a value is entered into all four of the Stiffness fields.
CAESAR II will calculate pressure thrust on the expansion joint if the bellows effective id is given in the
expansion joint auxiliary screen. The mathematical model for pressure thrust applies a force equal to the
pressure times the effective area of the bellows at either end of the expansion joint. The force will tend to
open the bellows if the pressure is positive, and close the bellows if the pressure is negative. Users should
note that this model does not exactly distribute the pressure loads correctly in the vicinity of the expansion
joint. In most cases the misapplied load does not effect the solution. There are two components of the
pressure thrust to be applied in practice, rather than the one component applied in the model. The first
component is equal to the pressure times the inside area of the pipe and acts at the first change in direction
of the pipe on either side of the expansion joint. This load will tend to put the pipe wall between the
change in direction and the expansion joint in tension. The second component is equal to the pressure
times the difference between the bellows effective area and inside pipe area. This load acts at the end of
the expansion joint and tends to open the bellows up, putting the pipe between the expansion joint and the
change in direction in compression. In the mathematical model the full component of the pressure thrust
force is placed on the ends of the bellows instead of having a portion shifted out on either side of the
expansion joint. A large number of expansion joint examples can be found in Chapter 5 of the Applications
Guide.
8 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Operating Case
Immediately after the “restrained weight” case, an operating analysis is performed. The “Y” restraints are
removed from the hanger locations and the hot loads just calculated are inserted. Any anchors that were
freed for the “restrained weight” analysis are fixed.
The operating case vertical displacement at each hanger location defines that hanger’s “travel.” If there
were single directional restraints or gaps in the system that changed status in the operating case then the
possibility exists that loads on hangers will be redistributed. When a nonlinear status change is detected
CAESAR II reruns the “restrained weight” case with the restraints left as they were at the end of the
operating case. New restraint loads are calculated and another operating case is run to get the updated
“travel.”
The operating case must always be the second load case in the set of defined analysis cases.
The user has the ability to define the “restrained weight” or operating load cases for hanger design any
way he sees fit. For simplicity, CAESAR II recommends the load cases it thinks should be run whenever it
detects the first attempt to analyze a particular system. The user can accept or reject CAESAR II’s
recommendations. The user that sets up his own hanger design load cases should be sure he understands
exactly what is done in the “restrained weight” and operating passes of the hanger design algorithm.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 9
Operating case #9
Installed Weight ...if the user requested that actual installed loads are to be calculated.
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
When the Class 1 branch flexibilities are used, intersection models in the analysis will become stiffer
when the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and will become more flexible when the reduced
geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more load, and thus have higher
stresses (lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been “unloaded”). More flexible
intersections typically carry less load, and thus have lower stresses, (causing higher stresses in other parts
of the system that have “picked up” the extra load).
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class 1), 1992
Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, the following equations are used for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = RIGID
LONGITUDINAL = RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = (kz)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL = (kx)d/EI
Where:
RIGID = 1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d = Branch diameter
E = Young’s Modulus
I = Cross Section Moment of Inertia
D = Header diameter
T = Header thickness
Tb = Branch fitting thickness
kx = 0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz = 0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 13
Users are referred to WRC 329 Section 4.9 “Flexibility Factors.” A brief quote from this section follows:
“The significance of “k” depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if “k” is small
compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their k-factors, then the
inclusion of “k” for branch connections will have only minor effects on the calculated moments.
Conversely, if “k” is large compared to the piping system length, then the inclusion of “k” for branch
connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to greatly reduce the magnitude of the
calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To illustrate the potential significance of “k’s” for
branch connections, we use the equation [above] to calculate “k” for a branch connection with D=30 in.,
d=12.75 in. T=t=0.375 in.:
k = 0.1(80)1.5(0.425)0.5 * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !”
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating the
stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing “mistakenly” that the stress at the intersection
is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
The branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, i.e. has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will be no
“offset” equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A “partial intersection” is one
where either the header pipe is not modelled, is modelled with a single element, or is part of a geometric
intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the case where there is no header pipe going to the
intersection there will be no modification to the model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a
single header pipe is recognized, the local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in
accordance with the CAESAR II defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and
header. Users are recommended to build full intersection models at all times (not only when employing
the class 1 branch flexibility.) In most cases building full intersection models will eliminate problems
caused by the assumptions necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes are colinear,
the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential directions that are
tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
Note: The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated by CAESAR II.
There is no extra input required by the user to have CAESAR II build these intersections.
(If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from the header
centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch will be added to the already entered user offset.)
Automatic offsets will be generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the header
surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight length.
When a bend curved element is part of an intersection model, the offset and flexibility calculations will
not be performed.
14 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
It is COADE’s assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise it is not “sustained”) — there can
be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most apparent are those associated with the
cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations, however, there are also numerous in-between, as the
piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the “true” sustained load case occurs during the
installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its
cold condition, and watches it expand to its operating condition, it appears that the first case (since weight
and pressure — primary loads — are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal
effects (due to heat up) — secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the first case
he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot to cold are the thermal
expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both cases). Consider the further implications
of cryogenic systems — where changes from installed to operating are the same as those experienced by
hot systems when going from operating to installed. Once elastic shakedown has occurred, the question
becomes clouded even further, due to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during
both the cold and hot conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-
between) could justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is
consistent.
We have selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained case, since
thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the code), and this best
represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially applied. If the pipe lifts off of a
support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a thermal effect — consistent with the
piping codes’ view of thermal effects as the variation of stress distribution as the piping system goes from
cold to hot (this view is explicitly corroborated by one code — the French petrochemical code, which
states that weight stress distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion
stresses). For example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero should be
treated no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to 4,000 lbs (or
another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe became “overstressed”, it
would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This process is identical to the way that all
other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may not always
agree with us — that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor the analysis to one’s
individual specifications. If desired, a “hot sustained” case can be analyzed by adding two load cases to
those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This would be done by assuming that the pipe expands first,
and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be
segregated by segregating the applied loads, so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or
after, the expansion loads). Following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a “hot
sustained.”
Default New
W+P1+T1(OPE) W+P1+T1(OPE)
W+P1(SUS) W+P1(SUS)
L1-L2(EXP) T1 (EXP)
L1-L2(EXP)
L1-L3(SUS)
18 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth case
represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with non-linear effects
taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the “weightless,” non-pressurized
pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and pressure
to that expanded case, or the “hot sustained” case. Note that when the piping system is analyzed as above,
the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not arbitrarily removed from the
model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if (1) the sustained, primary
loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any supports that lift off (or
otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An analysis such as this is achievable
by setting the "Keep/Discard" status of the Restrained Weight case (the first hanger design load case) to
"Keep", thus permitting the results of that case to be viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained
Weight case automatically removes restraints that become non-active during the designated operating
case, and apply the Hot Load at each of the hanger locations.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 19
Where:
V - total lateral force or shear at the base
Z—numerical coefficient from table 22
K—numerical coefficient from table 23
C—numerical coefficient from Sect. 9.4
S—soil factor from table 25
W—total dead load
The g-factor can be found by dividing Eq. 6 through by W.
g’s = V/W = ZIKCS
The product CS does not need to exceed the value 0.14. Use this value as a conservative maximum.
The following table provides the seismic zone coefficient (Z).
Seismic Zone
Coefficient, Z
4 1
3 3/4
2 3/8
1 3/16
0 1/8
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 21
From the following table, the importance factor can be found: (However use a value for I = 1.0. The
categories in this table are identical for those used in the wind load calculation.)
The following table shows K varying from 0.67 to 2.0. Use K=2.0 for “Structures other than buildings.”
So the equation for the “g” load:
g = ZIKCS
reduces to:
g = Z (1.0) (2.0) (0.14)
and for the various value of Z:
Wind Loads
Wind loads are generated by multiplying the pipe exposed area, including insulation, and considering
angle to the wind, by the equivalent wind pressure and the pipe shape factor. There are typically three
different ways to get at the equivalent wind pressure:
ASCE #7 (1995)
Pressure vs. elevation table entry
Velocity vs. elevation table entry
The total wind force on the element is calculated from
F = PeqSA
Where:
F is the total wind force on the element
Peq is the equivalent wind pressure (dynamic pressure)
S is the pipe element wind shape factor
A is the pipe element exposed area as shown in the figure as follows:
Peq is calculated for each end of the element and the average taken. The average applies uniformly
over the whole length of the element. Note, the wind force is applied in the three global directions as a
function of the element direction cosines.
If the user enters a velocity vs. elevation table then the velocity is converted to a dynamic pressure using
the following equation:
P = 1/2 V2 where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.
The WIND SHAPE FACTOR is entered on the pipe spreadsheet and, for cylindrical elements, the value
from Table 12 is between 0.5 and 0.7. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is
“distributive.” This means that the shape factor applies for all following elements until zeroed or changed.
Important The user does not have to enter the shape factor on each pipe spreadsheet. Zero (or turn
"Off") the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of building or similarly protective structure.
Wind load data is entered on the Wind Loads (on page 51) tab of the Static Load Case Builder. Up to four
different wind loads can be entered per analysis. These typically might be set up to model wind loads in
the +X, -Y, and -Z directions.
The ASCE #7 ( 1995) Method for computing equivalent pressure requires several computerized table look
ups and interpolation. The user enters the following parameters:
1 Basic wind speed (mph) - The minimum allowed basic wind speed is 85 mph. This does not include
averages for abnormally high wind loading events such as hurricanes or tornadoes.
ASCE #7 refers to fig. 6-1 for basic wind speeds in the continental United States. The following
description is a crude representation of Figure 1:
The following procedure from the appendix is used to calculate the effective wind pressure:
1 Get the Importance Factor from Table 6-2 (p.17)
2 Get (Alpha), Zg, from Table C 6-2.
3 Calculate Kz from Eq. C2 (p.152)
4 Calculate Kzt from Eq. 6-2 (p.34)
5 Calculate qz from Eq. 6-1, (p.17)
6 Calculate Gz from sec 6.6
7 Calculate the effective wind pressure from
PRESSURE = Gz * qz * Shape Factor
Note: Winds of 20 to 40 mph can cause vortex shedding and excitation in the 30 Hz and higher range
that can cause fatigue failure in smaller line sizes particularly susceptible to fatigue type failures. To
analyze vortex shedding, use harmonic analysis methods.
24 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Elevation
The accurate elevation of each individual piping element may, or may not be important depending on the
total height, diameter and rigidity of the piping system and attachments. By default, CAESAR II starts the
first node on the first element at an elevation of 0.0. If this is not close enough to the true elevation then
the user should set the true coordinates of the piping system through the command EDIT - GLOBAL. This
presents a dialog requesting coordinates for the first node of any disconnected section. The coordinates for
up to 100 node points can be specified and saved as part of the input data from the model.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 25
The element loads generated by the hydrodynamic effects are placed in their proper locations in {f},
similar to weight, pressure, and temperature. Once [K] and {f} are finalized, a standard finite element
solution is performed on this system of equations. The resulting displacement vector {x} is then used to
compute element forces, and these forces are then used to compute the element stresses.)
Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element are a function of the
particle velocities and accelerations.
Once K and Re are available, charts are used to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. (See Mechanics of Wave Forces on
Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya, Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25 for example charts, which are shown in
the figures below.)
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 31
In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest) must be
determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification of the
depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz) / sinh(kd),
where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L -is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function. The
modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh( d) / sinh(kd), where:
- is equal to z / (d + )
32 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and acceleration are
to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still water level. This means that
the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and the
diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both depth and
position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore, these coefficients are in
fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view, varying these coefficients as a
function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented. This practice can be justified when one
considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the instantaneous wave height and period. According to
Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous
fluid particle history is necessary. In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are
recommended by API and many other references.
The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects on the
system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the increased roughness
causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the increase in mass and added mass
cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic amplification factor; it causes an increase in
the structural weight; and possibly causes hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrison’s force equation is based the “small body” assumption. The term “small” refers to the
“diameter to wave length” ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in phase with the
acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In such cases, the fluid
loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references at the end
of this article.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 33
Current Data
Profile Type—This entry defines the interpolation method used by CAESAR II to determine the current
velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are: a power law profile, a piece-wise
linear profile, and a linear profile.
The power law profile determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
Vd = Vs * [di / D]p
where
Vd is the velocity at depth di
Vs is the specified velocity at the surface
D is the water depth
p is the power, set to 1/7
34 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The piece-wise linear profile performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table (provided by
the user) to obtain the current velocity at depth di. When this type profile is specified, a table of depths and
velocities must be provided. The table should start at the surface (a depth of zero) and progress in the
direction of increasing depth, to the sea bed.
The linear profile also performs a linear interpolation to obtain the current velocity at depth di. However,
this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified surface velocity to zero at the
sea bed.
Current Speed — This entry defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are
(length/time) as defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always be a positive
entry.
Current Direction Cosines — These entries define the direction of fluid transport due to the current. These
fields are unitless, and follow the standard software global axis convention.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 35
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator — This entry specifies which wave theory is to be used to compute the water
particle velocities and accelerations. The wave theories presently available are:
Standard Airy Wave — This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can be found in
the previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave — This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free surface
effects due to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor equal to the depth
divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor varies as a function of the
location in the wave train.
Standard Stokes 5th Wave — This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned
references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave — This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The modification is
the same as applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave — This is Dean’s Stream Function theory, also discussed in the previously
mentioned references.
Modified Stream Function Wave — This is Dean’s Stream Function theory, modified to directly consider
current in the wave solution.
Stream Function Order — When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order must be
defined. Typical values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13 (see API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth — This entry defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level (the
surface) to the sea bed.
Wave Height — This entry defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance (in
units of length) from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period — This entry defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a
fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor — Because the two dimensional wave theories do not account for spreading, a
reduction factor is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration. Wave kinematic
measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the applicable offshore codes before
using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines — These entries define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unitless, and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle — This entry defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the piping
system. The phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0 is the wave crest,
180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Since the wave propagates over the piping
structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave phase angles. One analysis technique
specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then the phase at each node point in the model is deter-
mined. From these exact phase locations, the water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle (usually zero) for all
points in the model. This technique produces higher loads, however, the extra conservatism is warranted
when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
36 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation — This entry defines the height of the free surface, from the global system origin. If
the system origin is at the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system origin is at the
sea bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a CAESAR II model is at an
elevation of zero. This elevation can be changed using the [Alt-G] key sequence.
Kinematic Viscosity — This entry is used to define the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to
determine the Reynolds number, which is subsequently used to determine they hydrodynamic coefficients
Cd, Cm, and Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water are listed in the table below.
Fluid Weight Density - This entry defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is
approximately .037037 pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).
References
1 Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2 Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister, McGraw-Hill Book
Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3 Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National Engineering
Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4 Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand Reinhold
Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5 Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and Laboratory
Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6 A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7 Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean, OTC #1613,
1972.
8 Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9 American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American Petroleum
Institute, July 1993.
10 Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of Waterway, Port,
Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11 Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of Waterway, Port,
Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.
38 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane stress, the
local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus bending), respectively; and
K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material allowable stress intensity, and the average
material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) / 2.
Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of nozzles, as given in
the Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be classified as Q, or the secondary stresses,
regardless of whether they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and
leads to a much more detailed classification:
Pm—General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
Pl—Local primary membrane stress, which may include
--Membrane stress due to internal pressure
--Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments
Q—Secondary stresses, which may include
--Bending stress due to internal pressure
--Bending stress due to applied sustained forces and moments
--Membrane stress due to applied expansion forces
--Bending stress due to applied expansion forces and moments
--Membrane stress due to applied expansion moments
40 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contain three parts: two stress components in
normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses, the following rules apply:
Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm, Pl, and Q;
Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh;
Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pmand Pl; compute the resultant stress
intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh;
Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the resultant
stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated using a k value
of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2
and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not applicable to the shell stress
evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same
analogy, the peak stress limit may also be written as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < S a
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met based on
the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
“If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for cyclic
operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135 has been
satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design, fabrication, testing and
inspection of this division.”
Note: The Pm stresses will be calculated automatically if a pressure value is enter by the user.
1 Run WRC 107 to calculate the Pl, and Q stresses as defined earlier. Note that the local stresses due to
sustained, expansion and occasional loads can now be compute simultaneously.
2 Various stress components can be obtained from combining the stress intensities computed from
applying the sustained, expansion and occasional loads, if applicable. These stress intensities can then
be used to carry out the stress summations and the results are used to determine acceptability of the
local stresses in the vessel shell. Notice now CAESAR II can provide the WRC 107 stress summation
module in line with the stress calculation routines
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 41
Under the above procedure, the equations used in CAESAR II to qualify the various stress components can
be summarized as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)
K = 2.
The modal matrix may be partitioned into two submatrices:
=[ e r ]
Where:
e = mode shapes extracted for dynamic analysis (i.e., lowest frequency modes)
r = residual (non-extracted) mode shapes (corresponding to rigid response, or the “missing mass”
contribution)
The extracted mode shapes are orthogonal to the residual mode shapes, or:
e
T
x r =0
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
x= Y= e Ye + r Yr = xe + xr
44 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
x = total system displacements
xe = system displacements due to extracted modes
xr = system displacements due to residual modes
Y = generalized modal coordinates
Ye = partition of Y matrix corresponding to extracted modes
Yr = partition of Y matrix corresponding to residual modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F=K Y=K e Ye + K r Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = total system load vector
Fe = load vector due to extracted modes
Fr = load vector due to residual modes
Y = generalized modal coordinates
Ye = partition of Y matrix corresponding to extracted modes
Yr = partition of Y matrix corresponding to residual modes
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response — the displacements X r
caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the system
displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relationships stated above, Fr can be estimated as
follows:
F=K e Ye + K r Yr
Multiplying both sides by e
T
(and considering that e
T
r = 0):
e
T
F= e
T
K e Ye + e
T
K r Yr = e
T
K e Ye
Substituting e
2
for e
T
K e and solving for Ye:
e
T
F= e
2
Ye
Ye = e
T
e
-2
F
The residual force can now be stated as
Fr = F - K e Ye = F - e
T
K e e
-2
F
As seen earlier
T
M 2
=I 2
= T
K
Substituting e
T
M e e
2
for e
T
K e:
Fr = F - e
T
M e e
2
e
-2
F=F- e
T
M e F
Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass contribution)
according to the following procedure:
1 The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as
Fr = F - e
T
M e F
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 45
Note: The load vector F represents the product of the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force
spectrum loading; the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM support displacement)
for seismic anchor movement loads. Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the
number of modes extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency).
"Rigid,” for the purposes of determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the
user, through a setup parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA—that corresponding to the largest entered frequency of the
input spectrum.
2 The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural response is then
combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the dynamically amplified
modal responses as if it were a modal response. Actually this static response is the algebraic sum of
the responses of all non-extracted modes— representing in-phase response, as would be expected
from rigid modes.
3 The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to be included
or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - ( Fr[i] / F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%, however
numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the missing mass
correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is shown in the report as well.
Since CAESAR II’s procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the contribution of rigid
modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the frequency of the last extracted
mode, it is recommended that the user extract modes up to, but not far beyond, a recognized “rigid”
frequency. Choosing a cutoff frequency to the left of the spectrum’s resonant peak will provide a non-
conservative result, since resonant responses may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency to the right of the
peak, but still in the resonant range, will yield conservative results, since the ZPA/rigid DLF will be
overestimated. Extracting a large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be
conservative, since all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, etc.) give
conservative results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic representation
of the net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz.
46 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with the modal (dynamic)
results—SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute combination method of course provides the more conservative
result, and is based upon the assumption that the dynamic amplification is going to occur simultaneously
with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature (References 1, 2) states that the modal and
the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic loads are actually statistically independent, so that an
SRSS combination method is a more accurate representation of reality. For this reason, CAESAR II’s
default missing mass combination method is SRSS.
References
1 A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures, CRC Press,
1990
2 K. M. Vashi, “Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes,” ASME 80-
C2/PVP-50, 1980
3 O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, “On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics,” Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.,
1979
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 47
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful service.
Research done during the 1940s and 1950s (primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markl’s “Piping Flexibility
Analysis,” published in 1955) provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as well as design criteria
aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials were failing due to fatigue, a
process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal structures.
However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal homogeneous
material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains. Inside each grain the pattern
of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the molecular pattern is the same, but the
orientation differs. As a result, grain boundaries are high energy borders. Plastic deformation begins
within a grain that is both subject to a high stress and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage
between adjacent layers in the same pattern. The incremental slippages (called dislocations) cause local
cold-working. On the first application of the stress, dislocations will move through many of the grains that
are in the local area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations will move through their
respective grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries, so after multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries, eventually becoming so dense that
the grains “lock up,” causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further dislocation movement.
Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming cracks. Repeated stress applications
cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks propagate with additional stress applications until
sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to cause catastrophic failure of the material.
The fatigue capacity of a material can be estimated through the application of cyclic tensile/compressive
displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress capacity of a material is called
a fatigue (or endurance) curve. These curves are generated through multiple cyclic tests at different stress
levels. The number of cycles to failure usually increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a
threshold stress (known as the endurance limit) is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs,
regardless of the number of applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken
from the ASME Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code is shown in the following figure.
48 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
2 Shut down external temperature variation from ambient (70°F) to -20°F (200 cycles anticipated)
3 Pressurization to 1800 psig (12,000 cycles anticipated)
4 Pressure fluctuations of plus/minus 30 psi from the 1800 psig (200,000 cycles anticipated)
In order to do a proper fatigue analysis, these should be grouped in sets of load pairs which represent the
worst-case combination of stress ranges between extreme states. These load variations can be laid out in
graphical form. The figure below shows a sketch of the various operating ranges this system experiences.
Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the each end of each horizontal line, the
temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of each horizontal line, the number
of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. The procedure is
as follows.
Case 1: Cover the absolute extreme, from –20°F and 0 psi to 500°F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200 times.
As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The first range (-20,0 to
70,0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases. The second range (70,0 to
500,1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges are similarly reduced to 199,800
cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of “considered” cycles at
each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment -20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500, 1800 500, 1800 to 500, 1830
Case
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)
Between 500°F, 1770 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (188,000 cycles)
Between 500°F, 1770 psig and 500°F, 1800 psig (12,000 cycles)
These temperatures and pressures are entered as operating conditions accordingly:
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 51
The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
Example with Fatigue Load Cases Defined in the Load Case Editor
Once the job has been run, note that the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage report to
the list of available reports.
54 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
In both tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If there is not enough data to
utilize all eight lines, unused lines should be populated with zeroes.
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction and sign."
For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress intensity, as follows:
Note: Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional s'’am equal to the following:
am = Vm
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity equations; it
would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses; however, unless the fibers
are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix in order to get from fiber to fiber.
Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:
ab = intensified shear stress in composite
64 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Mini-Level Analysis
Although feasible in concept, micro level analysis is not feasible in practice. This is due to the uncertainty
of the arrangement of the glass in the composite—the thousands of fibers which may be randomly
distributed, semi-randomly oriented (although primarily in a parallel pattern), and of randomly varying
lengths. This condition indicates that a sample can truly be evaluated only on a statistical basis, thus
rendering detailed finite element analysis inappropriate.
For mini-level analysis, a laminate layer is considered to act as a continuous (hence the common reference
to this method as the “continuum” method) material, with material properties and failure modes estimated
by integrating them over the assumed cross-sectional distribution, i.e., averaging. The assumption
regarding the distribution of the fibers can have a marked effect on the determination of the material
parameters; two of the most commonly postulated distributions are the square and the hexagonal, with the
latter generally considered to be a better representation of randomly distributed fibers.
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
aa = aa /EL - (V L/EL) bb - (V L/EL) cc
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij , ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poisson’s ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poisson’s ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
66 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where Mini-level analysis provides the means of evaluation of individual laminate layers, Macro-level
analysis provides the means of evaluating components made up of multiple laminate layers. It is based
upon the assumption that not only the composite behaves as a continuum, but that the series of laminate
layers acts as a homogeneous material with properties estimated based on the properties of the layer and
the winding angle, and that finally, failure criteria are functions of the level of equivalent stress.
Laminate properties may be estimated by summing the layer properties (adjusted for winding angle) over
all layers. For example
Once composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters may be determined as
though it were made of homogeneous material – i.e., based on component cross-sectional and composite
material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the cross-sections,
and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be written as
aa = Faa / Aaa ± Mba / Sba ± Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb ± Mab / Sab ± Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc ± Mac / Sac ± Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab ± Mbb / Rab
ac = Fac / Aac ± Mcc / Rac
ba = Fba / Aba ± Maa / Rba
bc = Fbc / Abc ± Mcc / Rbc
ca = Fca / Aca ± Maa / Rca
cb = Fcb / Acb ± Mbb / Rcb
Where:
ij = normal stress along axis i on face j
Fij = force acting along axis i on face j
Aij = area resisting force along axis i on face j
Mij = moment acting about axis i on face j
Sij = section modulus about axis i on face j
ij = shear stress along axis i on face j
Rij = torsional resistivity about axis i on face j
Using the relationships developed under macro, mini, and micro analysis, these stresses can be resolved
back into local stresses within the laminate layer, and from there, back into stresses within the fiber and
the matrix. From these, the failure criteria of those microscopic components, and hence, the component as
a whole, may be checked.
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for Piping Systems
The macro-level of analysis described above is the basis for the preeminent FRP piping codes in use
today, including the BS 7159 Code (Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping Systems
for Individual Plants or Sites) and the UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore.
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order to
calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have material parameters
based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as thermal, weight, pressure, and axial
extension due to pressure need be evaluated simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress
calculation method; since one normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in
typical piping configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
2 2
S eq = Sx + 4t
(when axial stress is greater than hoop)
68 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
2 2
S eq = Sh + 4t
(when hoop stress is greater than axial)
A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the orthotropic
nature of the FRP piping – normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make the pipe much
stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one allowable stress. This is
resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design strain ed, rather than stress, in effect adjusting the
stress allowable in proportion to the strength in each direction – i.e., the allowable stresses for the two
equivalent stresses above would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design
strain is selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by the BS 7159 Code are shown below:
1 Combined stress: straights and bends:
C =( f
2
+4 S )
2 0.5
d ELAM
or
C =( X
2
+4 S )
2 0.5
d ELAM
Where:
C = combined stress
f = circumferential stress
= fP + fB
S =torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
= P(Di + td) / 4 td
XB = longitudinal bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFxi)2 + Mo SIFxo)2]0.5
SIF = longitudinal stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIF = longitudinal stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
2 Combined stress: branch connections:
CB = (( fP + bB)2 + 4 SB ) £ ed ELAM
2 0.5
Where:
CB = branch combined stress
fP = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + tM) / 2 tM
bB = non-directional bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFBi)2 + Mo SIFBo)2]0.5
SB = branch torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
tM = thickness of the reference laminate at the main run
SIFBi = branch stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFB = branch stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
3 When longitudinal stress is negative (net compressive):
f - Vfx x f ELAMf
Where:
Vfx = Poisson’s ratio giving strain in longitudinal direction caused by stress in circumferential
direction
f = design strain in circumferential direction
ELAMf = modulus of elasticity in circumferential direction
70 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The BS 7159 Code also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 71
a
b
= axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r= aa(0:1) / a(2:1)
a(0:1)
b
= long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength in under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
Note: This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress Code Allowable
a
b
(f2 /r) + PDm / (4t) (f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:
P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to be used for
tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process; no
consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required calculations
are not explicitly detailed.
74 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
dx = extension of piping element due to pressure
x = longitudinal pressure stress in the piping element
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 77
Required code data may be entered on the ALLOWABLES auxiliary spreadsheet; with the program
providing fields for CODE (both number 27 – BS 7159 and 28 – UKOOA are available). After selection
of BS 7159, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1,2,3 = longitudinal design stress = d ELAMX
Kn1,2,3 = cyclic reduction factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = ratio of hoop modulus of elasticity to axial modulus of elasticity
K = temperature differential multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)
80 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
After selection of UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1,2,3 = hoop design stress = f1 * LTHS
R1,2,3 = ratio r ( a(0:1) / a(2:1) )
f1 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the system.
Performing the analysis is even simpler than the system modeling. CAESAR II evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases; in this case three are built:
Operating (includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, pressure, etc.). This
case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational equipment nozzle and restraint
loads, hot displacements, etc.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case is used to
determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to evaluate
fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II presents the user with a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and results
type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From the stress report, the
user can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress criteria.
For UKOOA code, the piping is considered to be within allowables when the operating stress falls within
the idealized stress envelope (indicated by the straight line in the following figure).
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 81
Conclusion
A reliable, powerful, yet easy to use, pipe stress analysis program with world wide acceptance is now
available for evaluation of FRP piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP
piping codes. This means that access to the same analytical methods and tools long enjoyed by engineers
using steel pipe is available to any potential user of FRP piping – ensuring that design.
References
1 Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME, 1990
2 Olson, J. and Cramer, R., “Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Program MEC 21,
Mare Island Report 277-59,” 1959
3 Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Industry, 1989
4 Hashin, Z., “Analysis of Composite Materials – a Survey,” Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept. 1983
5 Greaves, G., “Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design,” Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6 Puck, A. and Schneider, W., “On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of Filament-Wound Glass-
Fibre/Resin Composites,” Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7 Hashin, Z., “The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials,” Journal of Applied Mechanics, March
1962
8 Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, “The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials,” Journal of
Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9 Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., “Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite Materials,” AIAA
Journal, Sept. 1966
10 Walpole, L. J., “Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,” Advances in
Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11 BS 7159: 1989 – British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced
Plastics (GRP) Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites
12 UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP
Piping Offshore — 1994
82 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
6 If a radius at the junction is provided greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then the calculated SIFs may
be divided by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
WRC 329/330 for the codes: B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC & ND, Navy 505, Z183, Z184, and Swedish
Method 2, do the following:
1 For ib, use 1.5(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9.
use 0.9(R/T)**2/3 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0, and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2 For ir, use 0.8 (R/T)**2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3 If a radius at the junction is provided greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then the calculated SIFs may
be divided by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for fittings in the
Nuclear industry. The Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than one because they
are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting SIFs. CAESAR II does not
permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If a Bonney Forge Sweepolet SIF is generated that is less than 1.0, 1.0 will be
used.
Even though CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, the user cannot specify two
SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example a socketweld SIF and an intersection SIF
cannot be specified at the same point.
For two element joints the largest diameter and the smallest T is used when discrepancies exist between
the two adjoining pipes. When the two element fitting is a socket weld then the largest T is used. These
selections are made to generate the largest SIFs and thus the most conservative stress calculations for
under specified fittings.
Note: The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the maximum mismatch.
Users must make sure that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied themselves.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types result
in the same SIF.
The B31.3 sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects all of the following codes: B31.4, B31.8,
B31.11, Navy 505, Z662, and B31.1 (1967). The default for the B31.3_SUS_CASE_SIF_FACTOR=1.0.
The calculation for the corroded effective section modulus is made from (pi)(r2)te where (r) is the average
cross sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe and (te) is the corroded thickness. The thickness (te) is
selected based on the noncorroded thicknesses of the branch and header, i.e. the lesser of Th and iTb. The
resulting value has the corrosion subtracted from it before the effective section modulus calculation is
made.
The Maximum Shear Stress is always calculated with the corroded wall thickness, regardless of the setting
of the ALL_STRESS_CASES_CORRODED flag in the setup file.
If different piping codes are used in one job. The code reported at the top of the output stress report will be
the code that was last encountered during model input. SIFs, allowables and code equations are all
computed in accordance with the code that is varying with the input.
The following piping codes do not, by default, include torsion in the sustained or occasional stress
calculations:
B31.3
B31.4
84 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
B31.8
B31.11
Navy 505
Z662
B31.1 (1967)
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 85
Torsion is not added because these codes instruct the user to add the “longitudinal stresses” due to weight,
pressure and other sustained loadings. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal stresses. The user can
request that torsion be added into the sustained and occasional stress equations by putting the parameter:
ADD_TORSION_IN_SL_STRESS=YES in the setup file. The torsion stress is still however not
intensified, as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered an oversight, and is
corrected in WRC 329. The user can implement this fix in his running of any of the above codes by
putting the parameter: USE_WRC330 in the setup file.
Note that the radius given in CAESAR II is always the equivalent “closely spaced miter” radius. The radius
calculation given for widely spaced miters in the piping codes is only to be used when the user breaks the
widely spaced miter bend down into individual single cut miters as recommended.
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced branch
ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The REDUCED INTERSECTION=<option>
parameter in the setup file allows the user of other piping codes to access these improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. Users taking advantage of this option should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the
ASME Section III codes that follow to make sure that any other parameters or input associated with the
reduced intersection calculations are set as necessary.
When the user requests pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, the pressure
stiffening is applied for all bends and for both miter types.
The defaults for the occasional load factor from the setup file used in the evaluation of the allowable
stress, is given in the text that follows for each of the piping codes.
B31.1: The occasional load factor is 1.15.
B31.3: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.4: This is 0.8Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.4. OCC does not effect a B31.4
analysis in CAESAR II.
B31.5: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.8: An occasional case is not specifically defined. If the user enters an OCC load case the
allowable will default to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress, i.e. OCC=1.0
B31.11: This is 0.88Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.11 OCC does not effect a B31.11
analysis in CAESAR II.
ASME Section III NC and ND: The default value of OCC is 1.2 so, the occasional stress allowable is
1.8 (1.2 X 1.5) Sh but not greater than 1.5 Sy. If OCC is set to 1.5 or 2.0, the allowable is set to the
minimum of 2.25 Sh/1.8 Sy (Level C) or 3.0 Sh/2.0Sy (Level D). Note in the latter two cases, Sm
should be entered for Sh.
Navy 505: Occasional cases are not addressed but will default to the method used in B31.1, and an
OCC value of 1.15 will be used as the default.
Z662: Occasional cases not defined, but if entered by the user the allowable for the case will default
to 1.0 times the sustained allowable.
BS806: The occasional load case is not defined. If entered the allowable stress for the OCC load case
will be K Sh, (the occasional load factor times the sustained allowable). The default for “k” is 1.0.
Swedish Method 1: OCC is not used. The load cases are not differentiated. The same allowable
Sigma(ber)/1.5 is used for all load cases.
Swedish Method 2: An OCC default of 1.2 as recommended in the Swedish Piping Code is used.
B31.1(1967): OCC default is 1.15.
Stoomwezen: OCC default is 1.2.
RCC-M C&D: OCC default is 1.2.
CODETI: OCC default is 1.15.
86 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Pressure stiffening is implemented by default. Users may deactivate pressure stiffening for B31.1 runs by
entering the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=NO in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
B31.1 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation. F/A and the pressure stresses are added to
the bending stress (whether the tensile or compressive component of bending), to produce the largest
longitudinal stress component. This is true for all codes insofar as the addition of axial and pressure terms
are concerned. The user can cause CAESAR II to include the axial force terms into the code stress by
inserting the parameter ADD_F/ A_IN_STRESS=YES to the setup file. The F/A forces discussed here are
structural forces developed in the piping independent of pressure PD/4t forces.
In 1980 B31.1 added a reduced branch stress intensification factor equation to Appendix D. This equation
came directly from ASME Section III. B31.1 continued however to use the effective section modulus
calculation for the branch. The ASME Section III rules clearly stated that the branch section modulus,
NOT the effective section modulus should be used with the new SIF. B31.1’s using of the effective
section modulus produced unnecessarily high calculated stresses. This error was corrected in the 1989
version of B31.1. Prior to Version 3.0 CAESAR II users had two options:
Use the pre-1980 version of the B31.1 SIF rules.
Use the very conservative, post-1980 B31.1 SIF rules.
In version 3.0 (and later) these options also exist, except that the section modulus problem is corrected.
For users that wish to run version 3.0 (and later) just like they ran version 2.2, i.e. without the section
modulus correction, they can do so by putting the parameter: B31.1_REDUCED_Z_FIX=NO in the setup
file.
The reduced intersection branch SIFs were not intended for reinforced or welding tees. Conservative
results are produced, but the original researchers did not intend for the SIFs to be used for these fittings.
The CAESAR II user can disable the reduced branch fitting calculations for reinforced or welded tees by
putting the parameter NO_REDUCED_SIF_FOR_RFT_AND_WLT in the setup file. This will produce
less conservative results, but can, in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) tells the user to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in Appendix
A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Para. 102.4.3.
Stress allowables for B31.1 are calculated from:
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default = 1.15)
88 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are kept the same in the B31.1 stress
calculation.
The B31.1 criteria “B” length for closely spaced miters is not checked by CAESAR II.
For reducers B31.1 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is: 2.0 max or 0.5
+ .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
Note: Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 can not exceed 100.
B31.3
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are kept separate and unique.
Since the B31.3 piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress explicitly, and since that equation
does not include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include the F/A
component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. (The code also says that the user may wish to add
in the F/A component where it may be significant.) Users can change this by placing the parameter:
ADD_F/ A_IN_STRESS=YES to the setup file. The F/A longitudinal stress component is by default
added to the code stress component for all other stress categories.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
No differentiation is made between socket welds with and without “undercut.” Codes that do differentiate
use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all others. An SIF of 1.3 is used for all B31.3 socket
welds (unless a fillet weld leg length is specified).
Stress allowables for B31.3 are calculated from:
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor Eff
= Weld Joint Efficiency (Only for pre-1980 B31.3)
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default = 1.33)
For B31.3 the flag ALL_STRESS_CASES_CORRODED=NO flag in the setup file returns the corroded
stress calculations to the way they were performed in the 2.2 version of CAESAR II. The corrosion is
removed from the sustained and occasional stress calculations.
See Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual for the setup file parameter
B31.3_SUS_CASE_SIF_FACTOR=<nnn>. This value can have a considerable impact on the sustained
case stress calculations.
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in the B31.3 piping code.
For reducers B31.3 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is 1.0.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 89
B31.4
Pressure stiffening is automatically included as directed per the code. Users may turn pressure stiffening
off by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=NO in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are kept separate and unique.
The Allowables for B31.4 are calculated from:
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.8)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = (0.9)(Sy) if the axial stress is compressive,
no code check done if the axial stress is tensile
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
B31.4 does not use EFF, (found in the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field). The minimum yield stress is all
that is required to compute flexibility stress allowables.
B31.4 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
B31.4 does not include a provision for the liberal allowable. This particular option is not used for B31.4
stress allowable calculations. The occasional load factor (used in the other piping codes for determining
the allowable stress for occasional load sets) is not used in B31.4, as the allowable stress is expressly
given as 0.8 times the minimum yield stress.
CAESAR II assumes that 419.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating stress at 90% of
Sy; when the net axial stress is compressive (i.e., when longitudinal pressure stresses can be ignored in
underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph establishes that: “Beam bending stresses shall be
included in the longitudinal stress for those portions of the restrained line which are supported above
ground.” CAESAR II users have two options for including this axial stress in their analyses:
1 Include axial friction restraints and include the ADD_F/A parameter into the setup file. Set the “fac”
value to 0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not present, so
the hoop stress component must be considered.
2 Use the “fac” value to have CAESAR II compute the “axially-restrained” stress and include it during
stress calculations. If a nonzero “fac” value is entered, the pressure plus axial loads in the pipe are
multiplied by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in the pipe when the
user has included both of the effects above.
90 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Users should note that paragraph 419.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poisson’s ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addiction of the hoop stress to the axial
stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure loads are transmitted
directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the Operating Load Case, where the hoop stress is
added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the axial stress is compressive. If “fac” is set to
0.001, the piping element is considered to be buried, so the longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the
product of Poisson’s ratio and the hoop stress, in keeping with the spirit of paragraph 419.6.4(b). “fac” is
automatically set to 0.001 when B31.4 pipe is sent through CAESAR II's buried pipe modeler. The stress
due to axial force will also be included for these elements.
The “fac” variable should probably not be set to 1.0 with B31.4 and thermal expansion cases where the
user is going from one thermal state to another state, i.e. where the case is of the form: DS1-DS2, and both
DS1 and DS2 contain temperatures. In this case the thermal expansion used in the restrained pipe
calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the load case definition. In the example above the
thermal expansion associated with the DS2 load case.
The base hoop stress on OD flag in the setup file is used by B31.4 when the hoop stress is calculated for
the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation. The default is to base the hoop stress calculation on the
average diameter, and the equation PD/2t. In the mechanical stress calculations the hoop stress is based on
the inside diameter. (This is the hoop stress that is printed in the 132 column CAESAR II stress report.)
For reducers B31.4 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is 1.0.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of the B31.4 code.
All Stress Intensification Factors, Flexibility Factors, and section moduli are calculated exactly as in the
standard B31.4 Code. Stress calculations are made using the uncorroded wall thickness.
Operating, Sustained, or Occasional load cases are treated identically (there is no provision for a code
check for an Expansion load case, so no Expansion cases are generated under this code). For these load
cases, three stress calculations are done, each with a different allowable. The stress calculation causing the
highest percent of allowable is reported in the stress report, along with its specific allowable. These stress
checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh <= F1 Sy
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| <= 0.8 Sy
Equivalent Stress: Se <= 0.9 Sy
Where:
Sh = (Pi – Pe) D / 2t
Pi = internal pressure
Pe = external pressure
D = outer diameter
t = wall thickness
F1 = hoop stress design factor (0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code)
Sy = specified minimum yield strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = axial stress (positive tensile, negative compressive)
Sb = bending stress
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + St2]1/2
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 91
St = torsional stress
B31.5
For reducers B31.5 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states the SIF is 1.0.
B31.8
Pressure stiffening is automatically included as directed per the code. Users may turn pressure stiffening
off by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=NO in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
No differentiation is made between socket welds with and without “undercut”. Codes that do differentiate
use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all others. An SIF of 1.3 is used for all B31.8 socket
welds (unless a fillet weld leg length is specified).
B31.8 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
The allowables used for B31.8 are
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.75)(Sy)*(Occ)
Where:
Occ = is the occasional load factor (Default=1.0)
Sy = is the specified minimum yield stress
In B31.8 Table E1, note 8 to this table allows ii=io. This produces more conservative results and is
recommended by Rodabaugh in WRC 329, and so is the CAESAR II default for SIFs. The only time the
SIFs are kept different is when d/D is between 0.5 and 1.0. In this case the out-of-plane stress
intensification factor as computed is multiplied by 1.5. See note 10 to Table E1. In this case ii = 1.5*io.
Where d/D is less than 0.5 there is no change to the SIF. (ii=io). ‘
There is no “liberal allowable” calculation for B31.8.
The OCC occasional load default for B31.8 is 1.0. There is no provision in B31.8 for occasionally acting
loads, and the stress summation discussion in 833.4(c) includes: “the longitudinally bending stress due to
external loads, such as weight of pipe and contents, wind, etc....” There is no differentiation between the
weight load and the wind load. The user must interpret the intention of the code in this case.
For reducers B31.8 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is: 2.0 max or 0.5
+ .01*alpha* (D2/t2)^2/3
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
92 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Note: Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/SQRT(t1) and D2/SQRT(t2) can not
exceed 100.
Note: The product of S and T (i.e., the yield stress at operating temperature) is required in the SH field
of the CAESAR II input
SL = maximum longitudinal stress (positive tensile, negative compressive)
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + Ss2]1/2
Ss = torsional stress
B31.11
Pressure stiffening is automatically included as directed per the code. Users may turn pressure stiffening
off by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=NO in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are kept separate and unique.
The Allowables for B31.11 are calculated from:
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 93
For reducers B31.11 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that the SIF is 1.0.
94 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb.
Users can always modify the B1 and B2 values for any node in the SIF&TEE Auxiliary field. B1 and B2
values modified on an auxiliary field only apply for that element, regardless of whether the node is an
intersection or not. When r/R < 0.5 the following equations are used for B1 and B2:
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0,
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0,
C2b= 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/rp), but not < 1.5
For reducers NC states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
96 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Note: Alpha cannot exceed 60 º. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 can't exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha 30 º, 1.0 if 30 º < alpha 60 º B2 = 1.0.
For reducers ND states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is: 2.0 max or 0.5 +
.01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
Note: There is an error in the code, the code states note 12 however, they meant note 14. Alpha cannot
exceed 60 º. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 can't exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha 30 º, 1.0 if 30 º < alpha 60 º B2 = 1.0.
CANADIAN Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. Users may include pressure stiffening on bends
by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=YES in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
There is no limit in Z662 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit the pad
thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For Z662 CAESAR II will not limit the pad thickness.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.
No differentiation is made between socket welds with and without “undercut.” Codes that do differentiate
use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all others. An SIF of 1.3 is used for all Z662 socket
welds (unless a fillet weld leg length is specified). This code has no provision for using an effective
section modulus calculation at intersections.
The allowable stresses are computed from
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)(T)
Sustained Allowable = (Sy)(Fac)(T)(L)
Occasional Allowable = (Sy)(Fac)(T)(Occ)(L)
Operating Allowable = 0.9(Sy)(T) If pipe is buried and axial stress is compressive
= (Sy)(T) If pipe is not buried and axial stress is compressive
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
Fac = Construction Design Factor
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the allowable
operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the absence of bending
stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress is compressive in the presence
of bending stress.
Users should note that Section 4.6.2 requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product
of poisson’s ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive, implying that
there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure thrust loads are transmitted
directly to the soil).
CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the OPERATING load case, in the following manner:
1 If FAC is set to 1.0, the implication is that the piping system is fully restrained (in the axial direction)
as described in Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2 If FAC is set to 0.001, the implication is that the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are
modeled (rather than just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure
stress from the equation (as described above), takes bending stresses into consideration, as required by
Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3 If FAC is set to 0.0, the implication is that the piping system is either not restrained, or is a “freely
spanning” or “above ground” portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this
case, the longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress (including pressure) is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4 For those elements for which the net axial stress is longitudinal, no operating code stress check is
done.
5 Users should note that CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
For reducers Z662 states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The Code also states that the SIF is 1.0.
98 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
NAVY 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. Users may include pressure stiffening on bends in
the analysis by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=YES in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Navy 505 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.
Navy 505 has no provision for a “liberal allowable,” i.e. adding the difference between Sh and Sl to the
allowed expansion stress range. This flag in the control parameter spreadsheet has no affect on 505 runs.
Navy 505 does use Eff in computing the cold and the hot allowable. The use of this parameter is subject to
some speculation however.
Navy 505 has no specific allowable for occasional loads. An occasional load factor, similar to B31.1’s will
be used, and the occasional allowable calculated from kSh.
The allowable stresses for Navy 505 are calculated from:
Expansion Allowable = f/Eff(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * Occ
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor
Eff = Joint Efficiency (Not explicitly in the Code)
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default=1.15)
The B31.3_SUS_CASE_SIF_FACTOR can be used for 505 to multiply the stress intensification factors
for sustained and occasional loads to be more in line with the current B31.1 practice.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 99
BS806
For BS806 the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating load case
allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the stress range
allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
BS806 SIFs printed are fti and fto for bends, and Bi and Bo for intersections.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. Users may include pressure stiffening on bends
by including the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=YES in the setup file.
Modifications due to flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bend types. This includes closely and
widely spaced mitered bends.
There is no limit in BS806 to the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit the pad
thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For BS806, CAESAR II will not limit the pad thickness.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
Important When there is more than one thermal case to evaluate, the following note should be read
carefully concerning CAESAR II's application of BS806.
Note:
Re: BS806 4.11.3.1 paragraph 2, for sectionalized systems: At this time CAESAR II only makes the moment
summation on a load case by load case basis, and does not take the largest moments for an axis for any
combination of load cases. The CAESAR II method was set up to allow the user to make, and combine the
effects of each of the load transients that the piping system undergoes. This is, for the most part the
method used in the B31/ASME piping codes. The BS806 method will be conservative in that it uses what
is basically a shakedown approach and computes a single worst case moment difference. The CAESAR II
approach still satisfies the shakedown theory, but computes the moment range for each different load
traversed. The BS806 method of combining the maximum moment range will be more conservative. The
BS806 approach also eliminates the need to know where on the pipe the stress is the highest. In reference
to the moment tables in Appendix F, CAESAR II users can get the moment difference between any two load
cases, but not the maximum moment difference for any of the three moment axes as requested by the
sectionalized piping rules. In satisfying 4.11.3.1(a) CAESAR II uses the moment difference between the
cold and the hot case to compute the stress.
Only a single modulus of elasticity can be entered for a single element for each job. Different elements
can have different moduli of elasticity, but that modulus cannot be varied between load cases in the same
run, i.e. cold and hot moduli of elasticity cannot be used in the same run at this time.
For BS806 in 4.11.5.2 the value of “n” is always taken as 1.0., i.e. all branches are of the non-interacting
type. See 4.11.4.2 for the definition of “n” for interacting branches (n is defined in the fourth paragraph of
4.11.4.2).
The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends is shown in the following plots.
100 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Where:
H = Multiplication Factor (0.9 or 1.0 from CAESAR II)
Sc = 0.2% proof stress at room temperature
Sh = 0.2% proof stress at design temperature
F = Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature.
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default=1.0)
The pressure calculation at intersections is made as required in BS806 4.8.5.1 Eq. (17).
The pressure stress as per 17 is computed and then combined with the bending and
torsional moments at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The “m” factor
is computed as required with a value of n=1, i.e. for non-interacting intersections.
Where:
Sh = Yield stress at temperature
F = Creep rupture stress at temperature
Fac = Usually 1.5, for prestressed pipe 1.35.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 101
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor
S1 = lesser of Sc <or> 0.267Sy
S2 = lesser of Sh <or> 0.367Sy
Sc = Allowable stress at room temperature (Stn2) Sh
= Allowable stress at design temperature (Stn1)
Sy = Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default=1.2)
If the weld is ground flush inside and out then the SIF of a girth butt weld can be taken to be 1.0. A weld
ID = 1, informs CAESAR II that the weld is finished and ground flush, and will result in a girth butt weld
SIF of 1.0.
Swedish methods 1 and 2 Beta in the code is entered in the Pvar field on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary
screen. Pvar is entered in percent, i.e. 10.0 for ten percent. The default if no value is entered is 10 percent.
Limits on the reasonable beta’s that users may enter for the Swedish piping code is 0.1 to 25%. Anything
entered less than 0.1 will be taken to be 10% and anything entered greater than 25% will be taken to be
25%. If no value is entered then beta will default to 10%. Note that 10% is entered in the Pmax field as
10.0. This applies equally for Swedish Method 1 and Method 2.
The USE_PDo/4t line for the setup file causes the Swedish method 1 code compliance to use the thin
walled equations as given in the codes for stress calculations.
The user of Swedish Method 1 should note that implied in the CAESAR II allowable calculation is the
assumption that the SIGMA(tn) multiplier is 1.5 for piping that is not prestressed. Users of prestressed
pipe (i.e. cold sprung) should change “Fac” on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field to be 1.35 as directed
in the Swedish code.
Note: The corroded section modulus is used for all stress calculations as per the definition of Di in the
Swedish code.
The default occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2 is 1.2.
The Swedish piping codes allow the pad thickness on an intersection to reduce stresses up to pad thickness
of 2.5 times the header wall thickness. This is greater than most code’s value of 1.5 times the header wall
thickness.
For reducers the Swedish piping codes states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that
SIF is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
102 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
B31.1 (1967)
The 1967 B31.1 piping code uses ii=io for full sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and
for reduced intersections uses ii=0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default. Users may activate pressure stiffening for B31.1 (1967) runs
by entering the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=YES in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends providing the bend is not
a widely spaced miter.
The SIF for a girth butt weld is taken as 1.0, as this was Markl’s original basis for SIFs.
No differentiation is made between socket welds with and without “undercut.” Codes that do differentiate
use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all others. An SIF of 1.3 is used for all socket welds
(unless a fillet weld leg length is specified).
The B31.1 (1967) allowable stresses are computed from:
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Where:
f = Cyclic reduction factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default=1.15)
Stoomwezen
SC = the yield stress at room temperature, referred to as Re in the code.
SH1 = the yield stress at design temperature, referred to as Re (um) in the code.
SH2 = not used
SH3 = not used
FN = the average creep stress to produce one percent set, referred to as Rrg in the code. F2 is
the average creep tensile stress to produce rupture, referred to as Rmg in the
code. F3 is the minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture, referred to as Rmmin in the
code.
EFF = the cyclic reduction factor, referred to as Cf in the code.
SY = the tensile strength at room temperature, referred to as Rm in the code.
FAC = a constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. Refer to Stoomwezen Section 5.2 for
details.
PVAR = the Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Where:
F = Cyclic reduction factor
Sc = Cold allowable
Sh = Hot allowable
Sl = Sustained stress
OCC= Occasional factor from the CAESAR II configuration file)
The Pvar value in the allowable stress spreadsheet is for the DIFFERENCE between the design pressure
and Pmax to be used in equation 10.
Equations 7 or 8 are satisfied by using as the allowable for the i Mc/Z stress the maximum of either F
(1.25Sc + 0.225Sh) or F (1.25Sc + ).225Sh) + (Sh - Ssl) where Ssl is the sustained stress as defined by
equation 6.
For reducers RCC-M states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
Note: Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 can’t exceed 100.
104 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including widely spaced
miters.
Inplane and outplane stress intensification factors of intersections are kept separate and unique.
Since the CODETI piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress explicitly, and since that
equation does not include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include
the F/A component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. Users can change this by setting
ADD_F/A_IN_STRESS=YES to the configuration file. The F/A longitudinal stress component is by
default added to the code stress component for all other stress categories.
Stress allowables for CODETI are calculated from
Expansion Allowable = F [1.25 (Sc + Sh)] - Sl
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = OCC x Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic reduction factor
Sc = Cold allowable stress
Sh = Hot allowable stress
Sl = Sustained stress
OCC = Occasional load factor from configuration (defaults to 1.15)
Pressure stiffening of bends is automatically included as directed by the code. Users may deactivate it by
setting the parameter USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING=NO in the configuration file.
Flexibility coefficients and stress intensification factors are phased in for bends with an included angle
between 15° and 45°. Their value is 1.0 for smaller than 15° bends.
The stress intensification factor of fabricated tees having an angle of incidence other than 90° are
increased by dividing them by (sin a)3/2.
Recommended occasional load factors are 1.15, 1.2, and 1.3, as per Code Table C3.3.
CODETI requires that when “the design temperature is such that the creep characteristics are determinant,
and if a section of the piping presents locally weaker characteristics,” the sum of the primary and
secondary stresses must not exceed the value FF (from Section C1.4.3). This requirement has not been
implemented in CAESAR II and has been left to the user to verify.
For reducers CODETI states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is 1.0.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 105
Where:
Sr = Minimum of 1.25F1 +0.25F2; Fr x Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) (The latter for
higher temperatures; above 425°C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370°C for other materials)
F2 = Hot allowable stress (entered in Sh)
OCC = Occasional load factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
SSUS = Sustained stress
F1 = Allowable stress at ambient (entered in Sc)
Fr = Cyclic reduction factor
Rs = Permissible extent of stress for 7000 cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
R1 = Smaller of F1 and 0.267 RM
R2 = Smaller of F2 and 0.367 RM
Rm = Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature
106 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Stress intensification factors for fitting types 6 (branch with raised edge radius), 7 (branch on locally
thickened pipe), 13 (conical reducer with knuckles), and 14 (reducer without knuckles) have not been
implemented in CAESAR II and are the responsibility of the user to enter manually.
The Norwegian code offers an alternative stress analysis method in Appendix D. CAESAR II does not
implement that method.
For reducers the Norwegian code states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
FDBR
The FDBR code is similar to B31.1 in most aspects. However, the following differences should be noted.
For reinforced tees, FDBR limits the pad thickness to a maximum equal to the header thickness. If a pad
thickness greater than the header thickness is entered, the program overrides it with the header thickness.
Reduced intersections are treated as in ASME NC, not as in B31.1.
The SIF values for butt welds differ from B31.1. FDBR uses either 1.0 or 1.8, depending on the thickness.
FDBR requires the use of the Hot Modulus of Elasticity in the flexibility analysis. Additionally, the
computation of the Expansion Case Allowable Stress incorporates the ratio of Ehot to Ecold. The user can
override the program computed ratio by manually entering it in the FAC field.
For reducers FDBR states that the Flexibility Factor is 1.0. The code also states that SIF is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the diameter and
thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan( length / (D1-D2)/2 )
Note: Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 can’t exceed 100.
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 107
BS 7159
The BS 7159 Code for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe requires that a single load case (OPE) be
evaluated. For that case, the following combined stress requirements must be met:
If Sx is tensile:
Equation 3: BS
S 2 + 4 ( S ) 2 < Sh
7159 x s
Equation 4: BS 7159 and
(2)
Equation 5: BS 7159 or, if Sx is compressive:
!EE ""
SS –+ v4SSs << SS h! -----
2 2
------
h EE-x
Equation 6: xBS 7159 and
x
(3) S x < 1.25S h
(4)
Equation 7: BS 7159 Where:
(5)
or
2
P ( Dm ) ( i si Mi ) + 2 2
S x = ---------------- + ------------------------------- P ( Dm ) ( i xi M i ) + ( ix o Mo ) F x
( 4t d ) Z S = ---------------- – ----------------------------------------------------- – ------
x ( 4t d ) Z A
(if , and it is compressive)
F x P( D m ) MT
------ > ---------------- S = ----------
-
A ( 4t d ) s (2 Z )
mP ( Dm )
S = ---------------------
2t d
for straight pipe
2 2
mP ( Dm ) ( i M i ) + ( i Mo )
S = --------------------- + -------------------------------------------------
2t d Z
for bends
2 2
mP ( Dm ) ( i xi Mi ) + ( i xo M o )
S = --------------------- + -----------------------------------------------------
2t d Z
for tees,
where Dm & td are always for the run pipe
BS 7159 allowables are based on material design strain ed . Therefore allowable stresses differ in the axial
and hoop directions by the ratio of the axial and hoop moduli of elasticity:
Sh = dEx SHOOP = ( dEx) (Eh/Ex)
108 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The ratio Eh/Ex is entered in the allowable stress Eff field; if omitted, it defaults to 1.0 (isotropic material).
Pressure stiffening of bends is done assuming the bends are fully pressurized up to the design strain of the
components (as per the code requirements). This can be deactivated by setting
USE_PRESSURE_STIFFENING = NO in the configuration file.
BS 7159 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation (unless this puts an element into
compression as described above). The user can cause CAESAR II to include the axial force term into the
code stress by setting ADD_F/A_IN_STRESS = YES in the configuration file.
The fatigue factor Kn is used inversely relative to the cyclic reduction factor in most codes, so its value
should be greater than or equal to 1.0 (allowable stress is divided by this number). Kn is calculated as:
Kn = 1.0 + 0.25 (As/ n) (Log10(n) - 3.0)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of cycles during design life
Kn is entered in the Cyclic Reduction Factor field(s).
BS 7159 requires that the temperature of the pipe material be considered as being typically only 80% -
85% of the difference between the fluid and the ambient temperatures. This reduction factor K is entered
in the allowable stress FAC field; if omitted, it defaults to 1.0.
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer
The laminate type may be entered in the Bend Type field, or a type default may be set in the Special
Execution Parameter screen.
UKOOA
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) Specification and Recommended
Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that
it simplifies the calculational requirements in exchange for imposing more conservatism on the piping
operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an
idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(sx / sx-all)2 + (shoop / shoop-all)2 - [sx shoop / (sx-all shoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
sx-all = allowable stress, axial
shoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 109
The Specification conservatively limits the user to that part of the curve falling under the line between sx-all
(also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where shoop is twice sx-(a natural condition for a
pipe loaded only with pressure). An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure
stresses are given a factor of safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other stresses are not. This gives an
explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 sab) / (r f1 LTHS)
sab = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r = sa(0:1) / sa(2:1)
sa(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
sa(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength in under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
Note: This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress Code Allowable
sa (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t)
b
(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:
P = design pressure
Dm = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary screen, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2, SH3 fields; r is
entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the EFF field; and the temperature reduction factor K
(described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the FAC field – if omitted, it defaults to 1.0.
K- and i-factors for bends and tees are taken from (laminate types may be entered in the Bend Type
fields), and bending and pressure stresses are calculated as described in, the BS 7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 code requirements, in the following areas:
Minimum Wall Thickness as per 4.2.1.1:
Where:
P = maximum design pressure
D = outside diameter of pipe
110 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Sustained/occasional stresses (CAESAR II does not implement IGE/TD/12’s creep criteria) evaluated as per
4.4.1 and 5.4.4:
Where:
The allowable principal stress ranges component for N Fatigue Classes D,E,F,G and W, (as shown in the
figure below (based upon the expected number of cycles):
Chapter 6 Technical Discussions 111
Note: If the pipe wall thickness t exceeds 22 mm, allowable stress and number of cycles are reduced.
Each component has eight different Stress Concentration Factors, depending upon type (pressure, bending,
thrust, or torsion), and whether the load is applied in a Sustained or Cyclic manner.
IGE/TD12 is the only code which supports (i.e.) provides Stress Concentration Factors for ) the Full
Encirclement Tee and and seam welded pipes and bends.
IGE/TD12 loads are based on a cross-section increased by the positive (+) mill tolerance while stresses are
calculated on a section modulus based on the negative (-) mill tolerance.
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical object
mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object into a similar
mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either two-dimensional or three-
dimensional. For piping analysis, the three dimensional space is necessary, since almost all piping
systems are three dimensional in nature.
Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these systems
are “Cartesian Coordinate Systems”. Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all other axes.
Notice that if the system on the right side of Figure 1 is rotated a positive 90 degrees about the “X”
axis, the result is the system on the left side of Figure 1.
The coordinate system on the left side of Figure 1 is the default CAESAR II global coordinate system. In
this system, the “X” and “Z” axes define the horizontal plane, and the “Y” axis is vertical. (The other
coordinate system in Figure 1 can be obtained in CAESAR II by selecting the “Z-axis Vertical” option,
discussed later in this chapter.) All further discussion in this chapter will target this default coordinate
system, unless otherwise noted.
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y axis vertical), and assuming the system shown below in
Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is necessary because
restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and stresses are most often
evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating the use of a local (element)
coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments. The forces and moments in this free
body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position of the element in the global coordinate system.
Note however, that each element has its own local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate
system of one element may be different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters ‘X”, “Y”, and “Z”, local
coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate systems use lower
case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: “xyz”, “abc”, and “uvw”. CAESAR II uses “xyz” to
denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a rule.
There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II, the following rules
are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a model.
The local “z” axis can be found by the vector cross product of the local “x” and local “y” axes.
An exception to this rule is the case of a vertical element. In this case, the local “x” axis is still aligned in
the “From - To” direction. However, you can’t “cross” a vertical element into global “Y”, so the local “y”
axis was arbitrarily assigned to align with the global “X” axis.
The straight elements of the model in Figure 7 are reproduced below in Figure 11, along with their local
coordinate systems. Notice that each of these straight elements has its own local coordinate system, and
that in this model, they are all aligned differently.
124 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
CHAPTER 7
Miscellaneous Processors
In This Chapter
Accounting ..................................................................................2
Accounting File Structure............................................................8
Batch Stream Processing .............................................................9
CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing.............................................11
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Accounting
The CAESAR II accounting system has the following characteristics:
Its use is optional. Users not wishing to keep accounting records of their runs never need to know that
an accounting capability exists.
Users conveniently controls all pricing factors. The total price of any job is computed from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF
Users enters C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and changes them only when needed.
Any of the constants may be zero but at least one must be greater than zero.
Accounting reports are generated on a per run basis and are summarized on a per account basis.
Reports may be generated for any user requested combination of account numbers.
Account numbers are user-defined and may be up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Account and program access can be controlled through the accounting system via optional password
protection.
Account numbers can be identified for each job using either of two methods:
Account number must be selected from a displayed table of allowed account numbers, or will
default to the last valid account number input. The account number table is set up and maintained
by the account manager.
Account number must be some non-blank string. There is no default, and the user’s entry must
match one of the allowed account numbers input previously by the account manager. Access to
the available account number list is password protected. Users not having valid account numbers
will not be permitted to run.
Generated reports contain:
Account number
Jobname
Time and Date of Run
Number of Nodes, Elements, and Load Cases
Calculated Job Cost
Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Processors 3
Accounting summary reports include subtotals on a per account number basis, the number of jobs run
under the account, and the time period the account has been active.
The accounting system is delivered in an uninitialized state. To use the accounting system, users must
change this state to active. (It may later be deactivated if the user does not want to use the account record-
keeping feature.) To activate the accounting system from the CAESAR II Main Menu, select TOOLS -
ACCOUNTING. The Accounting dialog displays.
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Select the applicable accounting method (either type 1 or type 2) and then click the Activate Accounting
button. The user will receive a that it is indeed activating the accounting as requested. Next set the
Pricing Factors by selecting the next tab in the window to show the sheet as displayed below.
Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Processors 5
Users should enter any costs as appropriate; blanks are allowed. Each rate is multiplied by the respective
job quantity, and the sum of these products is equivalent to the job cost. Job costs are calculated on an
integer dollar basis, and will never be less than one dollar. Any of the 5 rate constants can be zero, but not
all; and none of the constants may be negative.
Account numbers are entered under the Account Numbers tab as shown below. These are the numbers
that will be used to prompt users for an account number during program execution. Be sure to click the
Save button before exiting!
6 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Once the accounting system is initialized and the pricing factors are set, users can return to the CAESAR II
Main Menu and initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number will appear during
analysis, immediately after the user starts a CAESAR II execution. If type 2 accounting is implemented then
users must match the appropriate account number exactly, whereas all account numbers will be displayed
in a list box if type 1 accounting has been activated.
Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Processors 7
MMINUTE INTEGER*2 Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND INTEGER*2 Seconds of the minute when the job was run
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST) giving the last valid record number in the
accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST
Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Processors 9
The Define Jobs to Run button enables users to define the names and job types to be executed in the
stream. The job names are the usual CAESAR II job names that the user has prepared for analysis. The job
name specification screen is shown in the following figure.
Once the job names (up to forty) have been specified, click the OK button. The Batch Stream window
returns. Clicking the Analyze Specified Jobs button will start the analysis of all previously defined jobs.
The user does not have to analyze the jobs immediately. The job names and analysis types are stored in a
data file, BATCH.STM, which can be invoked at any time by the user. When the user is ready, the Batch
Stream Processor can be started and the “analyze” option invoked. The user can then leave the computer,
and return to review the output at a later time.
The Batch Stream Processor creates a “log” file of its progress so that users have an idea of how long the
process took, or can diagnose any failures in the batch process. This log file is named “BATCH.LOG” and
can be found in the directory with the jobs. This file is a standard ASCII text file which can be edited or
printed.
Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Processors 11
When the OK button is clicked the error text window is closed and the user has the option of referencing
further error information. (This may be desirable when one error definition references another.) The OK
button from the additional error information window returns program control to the main CAESAR II Main
Menu. This additional error information may be called upon at any time from the CAESAR II Main Menu by
selecting the DIAGNOSTICS-ERROR REVIEW menu option.
1
CHAPTER 8
Interfaces
In This Chapter
Overview of CAESAR II Interfaces ............................................2
CAD Interfaces............................................................................4
Generic Neutral Files ..................................................................59
Computational Interfaces.............................................................77
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases ..............................94
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
These interfaces are the means through which CAESAR II data is accepted from other sources, or data
generated in CAESAR II is provided to other packages. For the most part, this data transfer is from a
drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. The CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from
CAESAR II, and the AUTOCAD interface only transfers CAD data from CAESAR II.
Note CADWorx/PIPE provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between AutoCAD and CAESAR II, but
does not have to go through a translation procedure.
1 Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are: LIQT, PIPENET, the C2DAT Matrix,
and the CAESAR II Neutral File.
2 The CAD interfaces are intended to transfer the piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting
CAESAR II input must be thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
3 The interface labeled “CAESAR II Neutral File” is the only interface (aside from CADWorx/PIPE) that is
capable of transferring 100% of the data which comprises the _A (input) file.
4 PRO-ISO, CADPIPE, and AutoPlant are not stand-alone CAD packages. Instead, these are intelligent
symbols libraries for use with AutoCAD. The interface out to AutoCAD does not utilize any of these
three packages; it just creates a DXF file.
5 LIQT is a transient analysis package for liquids in piping networks, and can calculate pressure
imbalances as a function of time. This LIQT output is converted by the CAESAR II interface to create
force response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
6 PIPENET is a transient analysis package for liquids in piping networks, and can calculate pressure
imbalances as a function of time. This PIPENET output is converted by the CAESAR II interface to
create a CAESAR II dynamic input file for a force response spectrum analysis.
7 The interfaces typically prompt the user for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for another
file name. This circular procedure is continued until a blank file name is encountered or the user
presses the Cancel button.
8 Users and third party developers beginning an interface to CAESAR II are urged to follow the
requirements of the CAESAR II Neutral File interface, since this will enable all of the spreadsheet data
to be transferred.
9 CADWorx/PIPE is COADE's piping design and drafting program for the AutoCAD environment. Data
may be completely and seemlessly transferred between CAESAR II and CADWorx/PIPE, without
creating any neutral files or going through any intermediate steps.
4 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
CAD Interfaces
CADWorx/PIPE Link
CADWorx is an AutoCAD based design/drafting program (developed by COADE) with a bi-directional data
transfer link to CAESAR II. CADWorx allows models to be created in ortho, iso, 2D, or 3D modes. Models
constructed in CADWorx can be sent into CAESAR II, and models built in CAESAR II can be sent into
CADWorx. Modifications made in either program are retained for future transfers.
In addition, CADWorx allows CAESAR II output data to be imported and placed on the drawing. This
provides the ability to generate stress and restraint isometrics.
Since the interface operates seemlessly, no action need be taken on the CAESAR II side—CADWorx/PIPE
simply uses CAESAR II _A (input) and _P (output) files—so the CADWORX/PIPE option on this menu serves
only as a reminder. For more information on importing and exporting CAESAR II files to and from
CADWorx/PIPE, refer to that product's User Manual.
CADPIPE Interface
The interface between CAESAR II and CADPIPE is a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE
to CAESAR II. The geometry data consists of the pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and
node numbers. All nodal specific quantities (restraints, loads, displacements, etc.) must be added to the
CAESAR II input file in the usual manner by the user.
The CADPIPE interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single session. The first
prompt is for the name of the CADPIPE connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. Once the user specifies this file
name, the transfer process occurs and the interface program prompts for another neutral file name. This is
an endless cycle until the user terminates with the Cancel button.
The neutral file read by the interface program must be generated by the CADPIPE program. Details of this
step can be found in the CADPIPE documentation. The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred into the
CAESAR II directory so that it is available to the interface program.
The interface program reads the CADPIPE neutral file and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log file
of the transfer process. Users should check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file for
consistency and any assumptions made by the interface. The following paragraphs describe the layout of
the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral file and how it is arranged for storage in this interface
program. The data storage is maintained in two arrays, the first contains geometry data for each pipe
element, the second array contains additional loading and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. A “pipe” in this sense is an
entity between two nodes, which could be a pipe, or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry, where
all values must be specified.
Field 1 - ELMT
This is the pipe element number, which may correspond to an entry in the second array. This is also the
pipe/element number in the model. These values should be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1
This is the “FROM” node number, i.e. the starting node for the element. These values must be greater than
zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2
This is the “TO” node number, i.e. the ending node for the element. These values must be greater than
zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX
This is the “delta X” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “X”
direction.
Field 5 - DY
This is the “delta Y” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “Y”
direction. In CAESAR II, “Y” is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ
This is the “delta Z” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “Z”
direction.
Field 7 - DIAM
This is the pipe outer diameter.
Field 8 - THK
This is the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH
6 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
This is a restraint (support) indicator flag. If ANCH is 1, then there is a restraint on N1. If ANCH is 2,
then there is a restraint on N2. The type of restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND
This field indicates the presence of a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is 1, there is a bend at N2.
If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD
This field is used to specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. The value here should be
the desired bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD
This field is a flag used to indicate that the current element is a rigid element. The weight of the element
can be obtained from the second array.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means there will
always be a record in first array for pipe element #1 (this could be the only entry in the array). Any
additional entries will contain some type of change to data normally duplicated forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT
This is the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first array. This is also a
pipe/element number in the model. These numbers are sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1
This is the operating temperature for load case 1, found by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum
temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1
This is the operating pressure for load case 1, found by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum
pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT
This value is the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if the “RIGID” flag was set in the
first array.
Field 5 - TEEFLG
This value indicates the “TEE” type.
1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee
Field 6 - RESTYP
This value is the restraint (support) type indicator. Type values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Chapter 8 Interfaces 7
Field 7 - RINFO1
Data for supports, by default, the restraint stiffness.
Field 8 - RINFO2
Data for supports, by default, the restraint gap.
Field 9 - RINFO3
Data for supports, by default, the restraint friction coefficient.
Field 10 - MATID
The CAESAR II material ID value. Note that if the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it should be
entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD
The value of Young’s modulus.
Field 12 - POIS
The value of Poisson’s ratio.
Field 13 - GAMMA
The weight density of the material.
Field 14 - INSTHK
The insulation thickness.
Field 15 - INSWGT
The weight density of the insulation material.
Field 16 - FLDWGT
The weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).
Field 17 - TEENOD
The element node number where there is a tee.
Field 18 - (Placeholder for future development.)
Field 19 - (Placeholder for future development.)
Field 20 -(Placeholder for future development.)
8 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 6
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O1B—ATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 7
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0OPP—ATLATL 90.00
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 3.90000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 8
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-3O1B—ATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 9
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB—1dLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 10
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OPP—ATLATL 134.50
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 4.43999981e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 11
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O1B—ATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
ENTITY 8
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 8
ENTITY 10
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD 4.44000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
As the interface runs, status messages are displayed on the user’s terminal for informative purposes. Once
the transfer is complete, the user should review the .LOG file generated to insure that there are no
unexplained errors or warnings. The .LOG file generated for the above .UDE file is listed as follows.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 11, “FROM” node is 220.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity 11 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 13 Original nodes: 250. 260.
Final nodes: 220. 260.
Finished processing segment with entities: 11 13
Processing LINE_NUMBER: CAESAR AAA1
Entity 5 Original nodes: 100. 100.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 5, “FROM” node is 100.
CAESAR II type is 3.
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 14 Original nodes: 270. 280.
Final nodes: 100. 280.
Entity 6 Original nodes: 110. 120.
Final nodes: 280. 120.
Finished processing segment with entities: 5 14 6
Entity 6 Original nodes: 110. 120.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 6, “FROM” node is 120.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity 6 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 7 Original nodes: 130. 140.
Final nodes: 120. 140.
Entity 8 Original nodes: 150. 160.
Final nodes: 140. 160.
Finished processing segment with entities: 6 7 8
Entity 8 Original nodes: 150. 160.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 8, “FROM” node is 160.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity 8 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 10 Original nodes: 190. 200.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes: 160. 190.
Entity 9 Original nodes: 170. 180.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes: 190. 170.
Finished processing segment with entities: 8 10 9
Entity 9 Original nodes: 180. 170.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 9, “FROM” node is 170.
CAESAR II type is 1.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 17
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, look for the problem in
the .LOG file. First, identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the .LOG
file. Next, find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the .LOG file and ensure it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file. Finally, verify the information in Section 1 of the
.LOG file matches the interpreted data in Section 3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the following causes:
Occasionally an unexpected geometry condition will be handed to the CAESAR II interface program.
The solution to this problem is to update the interface program for the current condition. The user
should forward the .UDE file to COADE for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
An unknown item code was encountered. This indicates that the CADPIPE program has been revised
and new item codes added, which the interface program is unaware of. As before, the interface
program will have to be modified to handle this condition. The user should contact COADE and
inform the CAESAR II Technical Support staff of this error message.
The reassembly of a geometry containing OLETS should be checked carefully. OLET entities in the
CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping element they intersect. The
interface attempts to determine the associated pipe via coordinate computation and 3D intersection
calculations. There is the potential for this procedure to pass over the intersection point. In this case,
the branch containing the OLET will plot at the origin of the CAESAR II model. This condition can be
fixed in the CAESAR II input by breaking the intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to
the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files which have been submitted to COADE for analysis contained
errors. These errors consisted of either pipe doubling back on itself, or piping elements indicated as
bends where there was no change in direction. Both of these errors will be detected by the CAESAR II
error checker. However, most users quit before that stage and conclude that the interface is wrong.
Both of these errors should be detected in CADPIPE before the connectivity file is generated.
ComputerVision Interface
The interface between CAESAR II and ComputerVision is a one way transfer of the geometry data from
ComputerVision to CAESAR II. The geometry data consists of the pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities (restraints, loads, displacements, etc.) must
be added to the CAESAR II input file in the usual manner by the user.
The ComputerVision interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single session. The
first prompt by the interface is for the name of the ComputerVision neutral file. Once the user specifies
this file name, the transfer process occurs and the interface program prompts for another neutral file name.
This is an endless cycle until the user terminates the session by pressing the Cancel button.
The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the ComputerVision “EXTRACT PIPE”
module. Details of this step can be found in the ComputerVision documentation. The ComputerVision
neutral file must be transferred into the CAESAR II directory so that it is available to the interface program.
The interface program reads the ComputerVision neutral file and generates the CAESAR II input file and a
log file of the transfer process. Users should check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
20 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Intergraph Interface
This interface transfers a piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file into a standard CAESAR II
binary input file. The geometry data consists of the pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities,
and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities (loads, displacements, etc.) must be added to the
CAESAR II input file in the usual manner by the user.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph neutral file:
1 Run the Intergraph PDS Interface module to create an Intergraph neutral file. This ASCII file should
then be transferred to the CAESAR subdirectory.
2 As many Intergraph neutral files as necessary may be created and transferred. The interface will
continue to prompt the user for neutral file names, until the session is terminated by the user by
clicking the Cancel button.
3 Ensure the proper units file is active in the directory in which the neutral file is located. This is
necessary for the proper conversion of the data.
22 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Start CAESAR II as usual and enter the TOOLS - EXTERNAL INTERFACES- INTERGRAPH and answer the prompts.
File Name
This is the full path name to the neutral file, which must include the file suffix. On startup, this field is
filled with the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or use the
Browse button to search for a neutral file.
Browse
This button invokes a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the desired neutral
file. The top of this dialog contains controls for switching directories or drives, while the bottom of this
dialog contains a control to switch between the neutral file suffix types (.N or .NEU).
Minimum Anchor Node
This edit box allows the user to change the node number interpreted as the minimum node number for a
terminal point in the model. You should only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been
set up with a different anchor node range.
Maximum Anchor Node
This edit box allows the user to change the node number interpreted as the maximum node number for a
terminal point in the model. You should only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been
set up with a different anchor node range.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 23
Insulation Units
This set of radio buttons enables the software to properly interpret the 'insulation thickness' values
contained in the neutral file. This is necessary since the neutral file does not indicate the units for
insulation thickness values. The value selected here should match the corresponding value in the active
CAESAR II units file.
Once the Intergraph interface program returns control to the Main Menu, the CAESAR II binary input files
are available for access. The following modifications and additions will be necessary:
Specification of material properties; Material 1 is assumed, unless a material mapping file is provided.
The material mapping file is discussed below.
Specification of temperatures and pressures; the temperature/pressure pairs are assigned to T1, T2, T3
and P1, and P2 in order.
Specification of intersection types; unreinforced is assumed.
Specification of restraints details. By default, only anchors and double acting supports are detected by
the interface. If the exact type of restraint is to be transferred, the PDS system must be configured to
generate the CAESAR II restraint type indicators. These restraint type indicators are shown in the
"Additional Notes" section of the "complete Neutral File" interface, discussed later in this chapter.
These restraint type values must be placed in field 7 of the first "HA" property card to be recognized
by CAESAR II.
Specification of other loads. The weight of rigid elements can be transferred into CAESAR II for "3W",
"4W", "AV", "RB", and "VA" type elements. In order for the weight of these elements to transfer, the
weight value must be placed in field 8 of the first property card.
Insulation thickness and density can be transferred into CAESAR II also. The thickness and density
values should be placed in fields 9 and 10 of the first PROP card.
In addition, the LOG file generated by the interface should be reviewed for any anomalies. The interface
sorts the elements and then insures that diameters and wall thicknesses are defined for each element.
Depending on how disorganized the Intergraph neutral file is, some assumptions made by the interface
may not be correct and therefore require modification of the resulting CAESAR II input file.
Any major problems encountered by the interface cause the program to abort and no CAESAR II input is
generated. Users experiencing problems of this nature should forward their neutral files to COADE for
analysis and subsequent program modification.
If desired, a material mapping file may be defined to relate the material designations in the Intergraph
neutral file to the standard CAESAR II materials. This file must be named "PDS_MAT.MAP" and it must
be located beneath the CAESAR II program directory, in the \SYSTEM subdirectory. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 contains the PDS material name as it will appear in the neutral
file, and is 16 characters wide. Field 2 contains the CAESAR II material number corresponding to the PDS
material name. These values should contain a decimal point, and lie in columns 17 thru 21.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the Intergraph neutral file and
how it is arranged for storage in this interface program. The data storage is maintained in two arrays, the
first contains geometry data for each pipe element, the second array contains additional loading and
specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. A “pipe” in this sense is an
entity between two nodes, which could be a pipe, or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry, where
all values must be specified.
Field 1 - ELMT. This is the pipe element number, which may correspond to an entry in the second array.
This is also the pipe/element number in the model. These values should be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1. This is the “FROM” node number, i.e. the starting node for the element. These values must
be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2. This is the “TO” node number, i.e. the ending node for the element. These values must be
greater than zero and less than 32000.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 25
Field 4 - DX. This is the “delta X” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in
the “X” direction.
Field 5 - DY. This is the “delta Y” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in
the “Y” direction. In CAESAR II, “Y” is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ. This is the “delta Z” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in
the “Z” direction.
Field 7 - DIAM. This is the pipe outer diameter.
Field 8 - THK. This is the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH. This is a restraint (support) indicator flag. If ANCH is 1, then there is a restraint on N1.
If ANCH is 2, then there is a restraint on N2. The type of restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND. This field indicates the presence of a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is 1,
there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD. This field is used to specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. The
value here should be the desired bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD. This field is a flag used to indicate that the current element is a rigid element. The
weight of the element can be obtained from the second array.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means there will
always be a record in first array for pipe element #1 (this could be the only entry in the array). Any
additional entries will contain some type of change to data normally duplicated forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT. This is the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first array. This is
also a pipe/element number in the model. These numbers are sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1. This is the operating temperature for load case 1, found by scanning the Intergraph data.
Field 3 - PRESS1. This is the operating pressure for load case 1, found by scanning the Intergraph data.
Field 4 - RGDWGT. This value is the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if the “RIGID”
flag was set in the first array.
Field 5 - TEEFLG. This value indicates the “TEE” type.
1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee
Field 6 - RESTYP. This value is the restraint (support) type indicator. Type values are defined in the
"Additional Notes" section of the "Complete Neutral File" interface, discussed later in this chapter.
Field 7 - RINFO1. Data for supports, by default, the restraint stiffness.
Field 8 - RINFO2. Data for supports, by default, the restraint gap.
Field 9 - RINFO3. Data for supports, by default, the restraint friction coefficient.
Field 10 - MATID. The standard CAESAR II material ID value (1-17). Note that if the coefficient of
expansion is to be changed, it should be entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD. The value of Young’s modulus.
Field 12 - POIS. The value of Poisson’s ratio.
Field 13 - GAMMA. The weight density of the material.
Field 14 - INSTHK. The insulation thickness.
26 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Example Transfer
Listed as follows is an example neutral file from the PDS system.
! Model Design file(s) : ZG2:[006,006]MDLTEST.DGN
! : ZG2:[006,006]EQPTEST.DGN
! Line name(s) : P-1002
! Date : 26-JUL-89 13:58:12
DRAW ,P-1002,P-1002
LOAD, 202000E, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000E, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000E,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 202000F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001A, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001A, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001A,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001D, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001D, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001D,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020020, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020020, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020020,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020023, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00, 0.00, 0.00, 300.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020023, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020023,3,6,5,3
CODE,CODE23,ASME2,1982,D
TF, 3020009,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 25, 24
28 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The .LOG file produced by the CAESAR II translator is shown below, followed by a plot of the job from
the CAESAR II input module.
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also performed
on 3 & 4 way valves.)
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications
Chapter 8 Interfaces 39
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
PRO-ISO Interface
The interface between CAESAR II and PRO-ISO is a one way transfer of the geometry data from PRO-ISO
to CAESAR II. The geometry data consists of the pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and
node numbers. All nodal specific quantities (restraints, loads, displacements, etc.) must be added to the
CAESAR II input file in the usual manner by the user.
Select the PRO-ISO option from the TOOLS/EXTERNAL INTERFACES menu and enter the name of the PRO-ISO
neutral file. Once the user specifies the name of the file (without an extension), the transfer process occurs
and the interface program prompts for another neutral file name. This is an endless cycle until the user
presses the Cancel button. The neutral files generated by the interface will have the suffixes .PI1 and .PI2.
The neutral files read by the interface program must be generated by the PRO-ISO program. Details of this
step can be found in the PRO-ISO documentation. The PRO-ISO neutral files must be transferred into the
CAESAR II directory so that they are available to the interface program.
The interface program reads the PRO-ISO neutral files and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the transfer process. Users should check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file for
consistency and any assumptions made by the interface. The data transferred (and the data structure) is
described below.
In the first file, a record is required for each piece of pipe in the system. A “pipe” in this sense is an entity
between two nodes, which could be a pipe, or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry, where all
values must be specified.
Field 1 - ELMT
This is the pipe element number, which may correspond to an entry in the second file. This is also the
pipe/element number in the model. These values should be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1
This is the “FROM” node number, i.e. the starting node for the element. These values must be greater than
zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2
This is the “TO” node number, i.e. the ending node for the element. These values must be greater than
zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX
This is the “delta X” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “X”
direction.
Field 5 - DY
This is the “delta Y” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “Y”
direction. In CAESAR II, “Y” is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ
This is the “delta Z” dimension for the element. This is the distance between N1 and N2 in the “Z”
direction.
Field 7 - DIAM
This is the pipe outer diameter.
Field 8 - THK
This is the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH
This is a restraint (support) indicator flag. If ANCH is 1, then there is a restraint on N1. If ANCH is 2,
then there is a restraint on N2. The type of restraint can be obtained from the second file.
Field 10 - BND
52 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
This field indicates the presence of a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is 1, there is a bend at N2.
If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD
This field is used to specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. The value here should be
the desired bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD
This field is a flag used to indicate that the current element is a rigid element. The weight of the element
can be obtained from the second file.
Records in the second file are only necessary when additional data is required. This means there will
always be a record in the second file for pipe element #1 (this could be the only entry in the file). Any
additional entries will contain some type of change to data normally duplicated forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT
This is the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first file. This is also a pipe/element
number in the model. These numbers are sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1
This is the operating temperature for load case 1, found by scanning the PRO-ISO data for the maximum
temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1
This is the operating pressure for load case 1, found by scanning the PRO-ISO data for the maximum
pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT
This value is the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if the “RIGID” flag was set in the
first file.
Field 5 - TEEFLG
This value indicates the “TEE” type.
1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee
Field 6 - RESTYP
This value is the restraint (support) type indicator. Type values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Field 7 - RINFO1
Data for supports, by default, the restraint stiffness.
Field 8 - RINFO2
Chapter 8 Interfaces 53
As the interface runs, status messages are displayed on the user’s terminal for informative purposes. Once
the transfer is complete, the user should review the .LOG file generated to insure that there are no
unexplained errors or warnings. The .LOG file generated for the above neutral files is listed next.
PCF Interface
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF file is a flat
text file, containing detailed information about the piping system components, as extracted from a CAD
system. The CAESAR II PCF interface can read in a PCF file, and generate a CAESAR II input file from the
acquired information.
Details on the format of the PCF file, and its capabilities can be obtained from Alias.
To invoke the PCF Interface select TOOLS/PCF from the CAESAR II Main Menu. A dialog box like the one
below will appear. Explanations of each field are provided following the figure.
File Name
This is the full path name to the neutral file, which must include the file suffix. On startup, this field is
filled with the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or use the
Browse button to search for a neutral file.
Browse
This button invokes a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the desired neutral
file. The top of this dialog contains controls for switching directories or drives, while the bottom of this
dialog contains a control to switch between the neutral file suffix types (.N or .NEU).
Starting Node Number
This edit box allows you to specify the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. The entire
model will be renumbered (by default) using this value as the starting point for the model. To disable
renumbering, this value must be set to zero (as well as the node number increment).
Node Number Increment
This edit box allows you to specify the value used as a node number increment, employed during the
renumbering of the model. To disable renumbering, this value must be set to zero (as well as the starting
node number.
58 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Condense Tees
This option instructs the software NOT to treat tees as 3 elements, condensing them down to a point. In
either case, the SIF is applied at the tee node. Using 3 elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ
from the attached piping.
Condense Elbows
This option instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as 2 elements, one element for each direction the
elbow travels in.
Condense Connected Rigids
This option instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
Assume Standard Schedule
This option instructs the software to compute, wall thicknesses based on the diameter of the pipe and
standard schedule. Without this option, no wall thickness will be specified (for the JIS pipe specification,
this option assumes Sch 40).
Model Rotation
This group of radio buttons is used to specify the rotation of the model about the Y axis. The default is
zero which leaves the model alone. The +90 button rotates the model a positive 90 degrees, while the -90
button rotates the model a negative 90 degrees. (Note, the Y axis is vertical in CAESAR II.)
Chapter 8 Interfaces 59
Control Information
#$ CONTROL. This is the section division header. The #$ and space are required, as well as the word
CONTROL, in capital letters.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next line of the
neutral file:
NUMELT is the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ is the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS is the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM is the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
Next, write the 11-member array (IAUXAU) that contains the number of auxiliary data types used in the
input file. Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
These 11 values in the IAUXAU array are the following:
1 The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
2 The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
3 The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
4 The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
5 The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
6 The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
7 The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
8 The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
9 The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
10 The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
11 The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
IZUP flag. Equal to 0 for the global -Y axis vertical, equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
Basic Element Data
#$ ELEMENTS. This is the section division header. The #$ and space are required, as well as the word
ELEMENTS, all in capital letters.
This section of the file contains integer and real data for each element in the input file. The data are
organized as such:
1 real values for element “i”
2 integer values for element “i”
3 real values for element “i+1”
4 integer values for element “i+1”
These real and integer values are stored in arrays, described as follows:
A 36-member array (REL) contains the real basic-element data. The REL array is dimensioned (N1,36).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 36 items on the appropriate six
lines of the neutral file.
1 FROM node number
2 TO node number
Chapter 8 Interfaces 61
3 Delta X
4 Delta Y
5 Delta Z
6 Diameter (value stored here is actual OD)
7 Wall Thickness (actual)
8 Insulation Thickness
9 Corrosion Allowance
10 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 (or Temperature #1)
11 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #2 (or Temperature #2)
12 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #3 (or Temperature #3)
13 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #4 (or Temperature #4)
14 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #5 (or Temperature #5)
15 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #6 (or Temperature #6)
16 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #7 (or Temperature #7)
17 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #8 (or Temperature #8)
18 Thermal Expansion Coefficient #9 (or Temperature #9)
19 Pressure #1
20 Pressure #2
21 Pressure #3
22 Pressure #4
23 Pressure #5
24 Pressure #6
25 Pressure #7
26 Pressure #8
27 Pressure #9
28 Elastic Modulus
29 Poisson’s Ratio
30 Pipe Density
31 Insulation Density
32 Fluid Density
33 Plus Mill Tolerance
34 Minus Mill Tolerance
35 Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
36 Hydro Pressure
62 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
A pointer value of zero should be used where there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with
the current element.
Auxiliary Element Data
#$ AUX_DATA. This is the section division header. The #$ and space are required, as well as the word
AUX_DATA, all in capital letters.
This section of the file contains the auxiliary data corresponding to the elements. This data is arranged
in the same order as the IAUXAU array described previously. For example, if IAUXAU(1) contains a
3, then there are 3 bends in the model, and their data is found next in the neutral file. Also assume that
IAUXAU(2) contains a 5, then there are 5 rigid elements in the model and their data follows the bend
data.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in IAUXAU is zero,
then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at run time, based on the available free system memory.
These arrays are allocated proportionally, as a percentage of the number of elements allowed. Four
proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions correspond to the variables: N2, N3, N4,
and N5. Maintaining these proportions ensures that the neutral file reader can accept the file.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 63
#$ NODENAME. This is the subsection header that defines the start of Node Name data. (In order to
maintain downward compatibility, this section is optional.) The data for each element set of node names in
the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is dimensioned (N6, 2). Use
FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read first the character name of the FROM node and then that
of the TO node.
#$ BEND. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the bend data. The data for each bend in the
input file is listed here.
An 11-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,11).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 11 items on the next two lines of
the neutral file.
1 bend radius
2 type: 1 - single flange 2 - double flange 0 or blank - welded
3 angle to node position #1
4 node number at position #1
5 angle to node position #2
6 node number at position #2
7 angle to node position #3
8 node number at position #3
9 number of miter cuts
10 fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11 Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
#$ RIGID. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the
input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The single element of
the array represents the rigid weight.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the expansion joint data. The data for each
expansion joint in the input file is listed here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next line of the
neutral file.
1 axial stiffness
2 transverse stiffness
3 bending stiffness
4 torsional stiffness
5 effective inside bellows diameter
64 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
#$ RESTRANT. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the next two lines
of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated four times for the four possible restraints defined in the
auxiliary data block.
This will require two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification, which means eight lines total
for each restraint auxiliary.
1 restraint node number
2 restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3 restraint stiffness
4 restraint gap
5 restraint friction coefficient
6 restraint connecting node
7 X direction cosine
8 Y direction cosine
9 Z direction cosine
Note: Items 3-9 may change based on the value of the restraint type. See the help text for details on this.
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62.
The 62 possible restraint types are
Chapter 8 Interfaces 65
#$ DISPLMNT. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the displacement data.
The data for each displacement auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next lines of the
neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).
This will require ten lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification, which means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.
66 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
These 55 items are repeated 2 times for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Note: Unspecified displacement values (i.e., free-displacement degrees of freedom) are designated
through the use of a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for
each force/moment auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next ten lines of
the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This will require ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification, which means 20 lines
total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.
#$ UNIFORM. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each
uniform load in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 9 items on the next two lines of
the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,9).
This will require two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
UX1 UY1 UZ1 UX2 UY2 UZ2
{vector 1 & 2}
UX3 UY3 UZ3
{vector 3}
#$ WIND. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each
wind/wave specification in the input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral file. This will
require a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The five data items on each line are as follows:
1 entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2 wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3 wave added mass coefficient
Chapter 8 Interfaces 67
#$ ALLOWBLS. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for
each allowable spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 56 items on the next ten lines of
the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,56).
This will require ten lines in the neutral file for each allowable auxiliary.
1 cold allowable stress
2 hot allowable for thermal case #1
3 hot allowable for thermal case #2
4 hot allowable for thermal case #3
5 code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
6 code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #2
7 code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #3
8 Eff.
9 Sy
10 fac
11 Pmax
12 piping code id
13 hot allowable for thermal case #4
14 hot allowable for thermal case #5
15 hot allowable for thermal case #6
16 hot allowable for thermal case #7
17 hot allowable for thermal case #8
18 hot allowable for thermal case #9
19 code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #4
68 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping code, refer to
the help text for details.
#$ SIF&TEES. This is the subsection header that defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each
SIF/TEE spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two lines of
the neutral file. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,24).
This will require two lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified, which means four lines total for
each auxiliary.
1 intersection node number
2 intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary is only used to specify SIFs
3 SIF, in plane
4 SIF, out of plane
5 Weld id
6 Fillet
7 Pad thk
8 FTG Ro
9 crotch
10 weld id
11 B1
12 B2
These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
70 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
An array (IHGRNUM) lists the number of hangers at this location, for each hanger in the input file. There
will be one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRNUM array is dimensioned (N5). There will
be seven lines in the neutral file for this data, if all N5 hangers are specified. Use FORTRAN format (2X,
6I13).
An array (IHGRTABLE) listing the hanger table numbers for each hanger in the input file. There will be
one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRTABLE is dimensioned (N5). There will be seven
lines in the neutral file for this data, if all N5 hangers are specified. Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
An array of flags (IHGRSHORT) indicates if short range springs can be used at each hanger location. The
IHGRSHORT array is dimensioned (N5). There will be seven lines in the neutral file for this data. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
0 = can’t use short range springs
1 = can use short range springs
An array of connecting node numbers (IHGRCN) is available for each hanger. The IHGRCN array is
dimensioned (N5). There will be seven lines in the neutral file for this data, if all N5 hangers are specified.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
Execution Options. The next section of data defines the execution options used by the program. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13). This will require three lines in the neutral file. These values are
Print forces on rigids and expansion joints 0=no, 1=yes
Print alphas & pipe props. during error checking 0=no, 1=yes
Activate Bourdon Pressure Effects 0, 1, or 2
Activate Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 0=no, 1=yes
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature degrees
Use Liberal Stress Allowable 0=no, 1=yes
For the following data, use FORTRAN format: (2X, I13, 2G13.6, 3I13):
Uniform Load Input in g’’s 0=no, 1=yes
Stress Stiffening due to Pressure 0, 1, 2
Ambient Temperature (If not 70.00 deg F ) degrees
FRP Expansion * 1,000,000 len/len/deg
Optimizer 0-Both, 1-CuthillMcKee, 2-Collins
Next Node Selection 0-Decreasing, 1-Increasing
For the following data, use FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13):
Final Ordering 0-Reversed, 1-Not Reversed
Collins Ordering 0-Band, 1-No. of Coefficients
Degree Determination 0-Connections, 1-Band
User Control 0-None, 1-Allow User Re-Looping
FRP Shear ratio
Laminate type
74 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Computational Interfaces
LIQT Interface
The CAESAR II / LIQT Transfer program is used to generate CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files which contain the dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package, from pressure transient loading. The
CAESAR II / LIQT Transfer program reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
How to Use the CAESAR II / LIQT Interface
When the user reaches the LIQT Transfer module, the following input is required from the user in order
to process the LIQT data:
LIQT output file name. (This file is generated by SAI’s LIQT package with extension .FRC)
Names of LIQT nodes which identify the pipes that response spectra are to be generated for.
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the LIQT pipes.
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
Frequency cut off value.
After the proper user input data is acquired, the LIQT interface module starts the data transfer. During the
computation, the user will be apprised of the process status. The user can click the Cancel button at any
time to abort the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory during the
computation phase of the program. The names of generated force spectrum files have the following
format:
L*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model which corresponds to the
equivalent LIQT pipe name.
When all computations have completed, the user will be returned to the CAESAR II MAIN MENU.
78 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.
80 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Chapter 8 Interfaces 81
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 85
86 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
PIPENET Interface
The CAESAR II / PIPENET Transfer program is used to generate CAESAR II dynamic input data files
containing response spectra for input files which contain the dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads
are determined by the Sunrise System's Pipenet package, from pressure transient loading. The CAESAR II /
PIPENET Transfer program reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information needed,
and generates the response spectra. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface
When the user reaches the PIPENET Transfer module, the following input is required from the user in order
to process the PIPENET data:
PIPENET output file name. (This file is generated by Sunrise System's PIPENET package with
extension .FRC)
Names of PIPENET pipes whose response spectra are to be generated for.
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the PIPENET pipes.
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
Frequency cut off value.
After the proper user input data is acquired, the PIPENET interface module starts the data transfer. During
the computation, the user will be apprised of the process status. The user can press the Cancel button at
any time to abort the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory during the
computation phase of the program. The names of generated force spectrum files have the following
format:
P*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model which corresponds to the
equivalent PIPENET pipe name.
Further, the PIPENET Interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including spectrum
definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input file is ready to be run "as
is" or can be further modified by the user.
When all computations have completed, the user will be returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu.
Chapter 8 Interfaces 93
DSN Setup
In order to use the CAESAR II data export facility,you need to set up two Data Source Names (DSNs) on
the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the computer and how to
communicate with it, i.e. what driver to use. CAESAR II has capabilities to export data to either an Access
database or an Excel spreadsheet. Therefore, you will need two DSNs set up to allow use of this feature.
The names of these two DSNs are FIXED by COADE Inc.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set-up these DSNs automatically. However, in the event
that the DSNs are not set up, use the procedure listed below.
Setting up DSNs:
1 Click the Start button and select Settings and then Control Panel. A window similar to the following
will display.
3 Click the Add button. A window similar to the following will display.
The data source name MUST be the C2_OUT_ACCESS. The description is an optional field and can hold
any description information.
5 Enter the Data Source Name and the Description, and click the Select button to select the CAESAR II
template database.
CAESAR II is supplied with a template database that contains the structure to hold data exported from the
program. For Access: this file is named “caesarII.mdb” and will be present in the “system” directory of
your CAESAR II installation directory.
6 Select the file and click the OK button as shown in the following figure.
7 Click the OK button and a window similar to the one below will be displayed. Note that
C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSN’s.
Note: This above process needs to be performed only once per machine.
The figure below is a partial screen capture of the access database displaying the data exported by
CAESAR II.
This wizard, besides being compatible with ODBC (Microsoft Access and Excel) can also export data in
XML format. (Note that the Excel interface produces a semicolon delimited text file, which can be
imported into Excel very quickly.)
The interface is accessed via the Tools/Eternal Interfaces/Data Export Wizard menu command from
the CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the initial wizard screen; the exported data set can be developed
by simply responding to the questions and clicking the Next button.
The second screen requests the name of the CAESAR II piping file (the._A file) for which the data is to be
exported: the user must browse for it. Activating the Export Output Data Also check box provides the
ability to include any output results (if available) to the exported data set as well. Activating the Use
System Units check box converts the data to the set as well. Activating the Use System Units check box
converts the data to the set of units currently selected in the CAESAR II Configure /Setup. Selection of the
Data Export Output file designates where the data will go, as well as in what form the data will be:
selection of files with extensions of .MDB, .TXT, or .XML produce data in the form of Microsoft
Access™, Microsoft Excel™ semi-colon delimited text, or XML, respectively.) Note, a great deal of on-
line help is provided for this wizard, accessible via the Help button.
The next screen allows the user to select the input data items that are to be exported. Selecting no items
causes input data to be exported.
If the user has clicked the Export Output Data check box, the next screen allows the user to select the
type of results to be exported, and the load cases for which these results are to be exported. Clicking finish
completes the operation.
The resultant data file may now be queried or otherwise manipulated through the use of Microsoft Access,
Microsoft Excel, or XML parsing software. Note that a number of built in reports, queries, and other
helpful items (see the figure) have been provided in the default Access file format, or the user can develop
custom reports and queries.
1
CHAPTER 9
File Sets
In This Chapter
CAESAR II File Guide................................................................2
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data Files ...................................14
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
It should be noted that as a disk reaches its capacity, disk access can be slowed considerably. For this
reason it is a good idea to perform some periodic “house cleaning” on the directory(s) where CAESAR II
files are stored. This would involve deleting scratch files and old job files. The CAESAR II File-Clean Up
Files command option can help in this process.
ANAHLP02.EXE Help file for dynamic input and load case editor
ENGLISH.FIL
INOFLEX.HGR
MM.FIL
OUTPUT.HED
PTP-LRG.DAT
PTP-LRG.JHD
PTP-SML.DAT
PTP-SML.JHD
Chapter 9 File Sets 7
SI.FIL
TITLE.HED
MAT_FRP.INP
SIF&TD12.INP
Dynamics Description
DYN.EXE Dynamic setup/Harmonic Solution
NETUSER.BAT
Examples Description
45-75 DLF file for HAMMER job
INPUT, Static
._A * Contains the User’s spreadsheet input data.
._J * Contains the load case data.
INPUT, Dynamic
._7 * Contains the User’s dynamic input data.
INPUT, Structural
.STR * Contains the User’s structural input data.
INPUT, Soil
.SOI * Contains the User’s soil property data.
Scratch
._B Nodal boundary condition file, created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis modules.
._C Element properties file, created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis modules.
._N Nodal coordinate file, created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis modules.
._R Job control information, created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis modules.
._E Element connectivity file, created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis modules.
._X Structural geometry file for use with piping preprocessor.
._1 Scratch file
._2 Scratch file
._5 Scratch file with intermediate hanger data
._6 Scratch file
.DXF Geometric data file created for input into AUTOCAD
.HAR Harmonic components for animation
.FRQ Harmonic solution frequency & phase data
._L Intermediate harmonic data file
.XYT Animation output data file from time history analysis
Listing
.MSG Secondary output file with intermediate computation data
.LST Data listing file
Chapter 9 File Sets 15
Output
._M ** Intermediate output file, contains data generated by the piping error checker and load case setup modules
._P ** Static output data file
._Q ** Actual harmonic displacement data
._S ** Dynamic output data file
._T ** Time history output data file
.OUT User generated output (text) data file
.VAL Intermediate eigenvalue output file
.VEC Intermediate eigenvector output file
.OTL ** Input/Output QA sequencing data file
Note: All of these files may not be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent on what
analysis has been run.
1
CHAPTER 10
Update History
The following lists detail the addition and modifications made to CAESAR II by version number. These
lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items such as: minor releases
(1.0P, 2.1D); re-publication of the User Guide: or additional new modules released to aid users between
updates.
In This Chapter
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ......................................2
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86)...................................3
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ................................4
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................5
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ..................................6
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90).....................................7
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90)...................................8
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91)...................................9
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91).................................10
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92)...................................11
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92)...................................12
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93)...................................13
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93).................................15
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ....16
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95).......18
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96)...................................20
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97).......21
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements (1/98) ....23
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements (1/99) ....24
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements (2/00) ....25
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements (3/01) ....26
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Features .............................................27
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Technical Changes and Enhancements ( 5/02) 28
2 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Miscellaneous Modifications
Screen data presentation changes
Direct control jumping between executables
Increased number of allowed program designed hangers
Additional spring hanger design options
Database Updates include additional spring hanger tables
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe
Chapter 10 Update History 9
Miscellaneous
A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on the
screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide screen
dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allows users to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the HEI
bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and to
provide a “local” element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II will utilize ESL devices to authorize access to the program. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client information
to the program. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update pages for the User
Manual.
Note: The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for the keydisks
(both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly activate the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page for
dot matrix printers. Users with page lengths longer than 11 inches will find this program very
useful.
10 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
Interfaces Added
A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
An interface is provided between Stoner’s LIQT program and the dynamic modules of CAESAR II.
This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be used in the generation
of a force spectrum.
Miscellaneous Changes
The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress percent is
reported, not the maximum code stress.
A “miscellaneous” option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows various
options, including the specification of either the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output reports by
load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal sorting of
the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging. The
initial display of the file names can also be controlled by the user. This allows the user to set the
sort order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This will aid in
detecting program corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A new report has been added to the static output menu. This will enable users to obtain a “local
force/moment” report for the elements in the system.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis. Note,
this module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.
Chapter 10 Update History 13
PCX Files—All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved to disk
files in PCX format. This will enable these images to be brought into word processing and desktop
publishing systems.
Chapter 10 Update History 15
All “language” files have been translated into German. Use “INSTALL /G” to acquire the German
files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the Main Menu.
20 CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping has been
added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been expanded to
consider calculation of stresses in “restrained” piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been incorporated
into the WRC-107 module.
The “Relief Load Synthesis” dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve calculational results
or program performance:
Changed From To
BEND_LENGTH_ATTACHMENT= 5.0 1.0
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE = NO YES
FRICT_STIFF = 50000 1.0E6
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR = 25 15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR = 30 15
VALVE_&_FLANGE = GENERIC CADWORX
Four new directives added to the configuration file.
SYSTEM_DIRECTORY_NAME—User defined, defaults to SYSTEM (note user may now maintain
multiple system directories for different projects)
UNITS_FILE_NAME—User selected from list (note current units are now set through the
configuration/setup, not through the units option of the main menu)
BS_7159_PRESSURE_STIFFENING—Design strain or Actual Pressure
FRP_PROPERTY_DATA_FILE—User selected from list
The configuration file can also be password protected in the Installation Directory. This prevents
modification of all Computation and Stress Control directives. Subsequent use of the configuration
module prevents modification of these directives, unless the password is known. Colors, printer settings,
etc. may still be changed by users without the password.
CAESAR II has been modified to accept an optional job name (including full drive and path data) as an
argument; the program switches to the appropriate drive and directory, opens the specified job, and goes
into input (bypassing the Main Menu). This allows the definition of ._A files as CAESAR II input files
(under Windows 95) and subsequent double clicking on the file name in a Windows/95 explorer window
to start the input processor on the picked job file. This also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other
programs, right into a job.
Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
All necessary routines have been checked (and modified where appropriate) to address the “Year 2000”
issue.
A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.
A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).
PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API 650 nozzle
connections.
Chapter 10 Update History 23
Index
Hangers/Nozzles • 17
Harmonic • 3 I
Analysis • 42, 75, 22 ID manifold piping • 83
AnalysisHarmonic ID Manifold Piping • 83
Analysis • 42 ID of relief valve orifice • 78
Displacements • 12 ID of Relief Valve Orifice • 78
Equation • 42 ID of relief valve piping • 78
Forces and displacements • 10 ID of Relief Valve Piping • 78
Load • 75 ID of vent stack piping • 78
Load vector • 42 ID of Vent Stack Piping • 78
Method • 3 ID relief exit piping • 83
Harmonic Analysis • 8, 42 ID Relief Exit Piping • 83
Harmonic Displacements • 12 ID relief orifice or rupture disk opening • 83
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk Opening • 83
• 13 ID supply header • 83
Harmonic Forces • 10 ID Supply Header • 83
HarmonicHarmonic Idealized
Profile • 3 Allowable stress envelope • 57
Header Pipe Outside Diameter • 76 Identical results • 1
Header Pipe Wall Thickness • 76 IEEE 344-1975 • 64
Header stress intensification • 23 IGE/TD/12 • 109
Help screen • 4 IGE/tD/12 code • 7, 16, 63
Help screens and units • 2 Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness • 6
Help Screens and Units • 2 Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for
Highlight • 114 Piping Systems • 67
Highlights • 18, 114 Importance factor • 20, 22
Hinged • 86 Impulse • 6
Hoop Impulse Impulse profile • 6
Direction • 55 INC • 26, 28, 30, 34, 36, 48, 50
Elastic modulus • 22 Include
Modulus • 9 Missing mass components (y/n)Include
Stress • 60 Missing mass components • 68
Stress value • 11 Piping input files • 103
Horizontal thermal bowing tolerance • 16 Pseudostatic (anchor movement)
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance • 16 componentsInclude
Horizontal threshold value • 16 Pseudostatic (anchor movement) components • 68
Hot Include Additional Bend Nodes • 23
Allowable stress • 56 Include Missing Mass Components (Y/N) • 68,
Hanger loads • 39 69
Load • 31, 8 Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement)
Load design • 31 Components (Y/N) • 68, 69
Modulus • 60 Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel
Sustained • 16 Cases • 6
How to Use the CAESAR II / LIQT Interface • Included force • 54
77 Included mass • 54
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Including Structural Models • 104
Interface • 92 Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading • 25 Design Algorithm • 10
Hydrodynamic loads • 27 Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction • 43
12 Index